We provide a stable and user‑friendly network operating environment optimized for customers’ diverse cloud environments.
This is the multi-page printable view of this section. Click here to print.
Networking
- 1: VPC
- 1.1: Overview
- 1.1.1: ServiceWatch Metrics
- 1.2: How-to guides
- 1.2.1: Subnet
- 1.2.2: Port
- 1.2.3: Internet Gateway
- 1.2.4: NAT Gateway
- 1.2.5: Public IP
- 1.2.6: Private NAT
- 1.2.7: VPC Endpoint
- 1.2.8: VPC Peering
- 1.2.9: Transit Gateway
- 1.2.10: PrivateLink Service
- 1.2.11: PrivateLink Endpoint
- 1.2.12: NAT Logging
- 1.3: API Reference
- 1.4: CLI Reference
- 1.5: Release Note
- 2: Security Group
- 2.1: Overview
- 2.2: How-to guides
- 2.2.1: Security Group Logging
- 2.2.2: Migration Rules
- 2.3: API Reference
- 2.4: CLI Reference
- 2.5: Release Note
- 3: Load Balancer
- 3.1: Overview
- 3.1.1: ServiceWatch metric
- 3.2: How-to guides
- 3.2.1: LB Server Groups
- 3.2.2: LB Health Check
- 3.3: API Reference
- 3.4: CLI Reference
- 3.5: Release Note
- 4: DNS
- 4.1: Overview
- 4.1.1: TLD List
- 4.1.2: ServiceWatch Metrics
- 4.2: How-to guides
- 4.2.1: Private DNS
- 4.2.2: Hosted Zone
- 4.2.3: Public Domain Name
- 4.3: Release Note
- 5: VPN
- 5.1: Overview
- 5.1.1: ServiceWatch Metrics
- 5.2: How-to guides
- 5.2.1: VPN Tunnel
- 5.3: API Reference
- 5.4: CLI Reference
- 5.5: Release Note
- 6: Firewall
- 6.1: Overview
- 6.2: How-to guides
- 6.2.1: Firewall Logging
- 6.2.2: Migration Rules
- 6.3: API Reference
- 6.4: CLI Reference
- 6.5: Release Note
- 7: Direct Connect
- 7.1: Overview
- 7.1.1: ServiceWatch Metrics
- 7.2: How-to guides
- 7.3: API Reference
- 7.4: CLI Reference
- 7.5: Release Note
- 8: Cloud LAN-Campus
- 8.1: Overview
- 8.2: How-to guides
- 8.3: Release Note
- 9: Cloud LAN-Campus
- 9.1: Overview
- 9.2: How-to guides
- 9.3: Release Note
- 10: Cloud LAN-Data Center
- 10.1: Overview
- 10.2: How-to guides
- 10.3: Release Note
- 11: Cloud WAN
- 11.1: Overview
- 11.1.1: Monitoring Metrics
- 11.2: How-to guides
- 11.3: Release Note
- 12: SASE
- 12.1: Overview
- 12.2: How-to guides
- 12.2.1: SASE Lastmile
- 12.3: Release Note
- 13: Cloud Last Mile
- 13.1: Overview
- 13.2: How-to guides
- 13.2.1: Circuit and Edge
- 13.3: Release Note
- 14: Global CDN
- 14.1: Overview
- 14.1.1: ServiceWatch Metrics
- 14.2: How-to guides
- 14.3: API Reference
- 14.4: CLI Reference
- 14.5: Release Note
- 15: GSLB
- 15.1: Overview
- 15.2: How-to guides
- 15.3: API Reference
- 15.4: CLI Reference
- 15.5: Release Note
- 16: Cloud Virtual Circuit
- 16.1: Overview
- 16.2: How-to guides
- 16.3: Release Note
- 17: Private 5G Cloud
- 17.1: Overview
- 17.2: How-to guides
- 17.3: Release Note
1 - VPC
1.1 - Overview
Service Overview
Samsung Cloud Platform provides VPC services to support the use of a logically isolated, customer-dedicated private network space in the cloud environment.
VPC (Virtual Private Cloud) is a service that provides a logically isolated, customer-dedicated private network space in a cloud environment. Depending on the use case, you can create a General Subnet and a Local Subnet for communication between servers, and freely select NAT Gateway and Internet Gateway to configure various networks. You can create multiple VPCs and operate them independently. VPC Peering enables connectivity configuration between VPCs.
Service Architecture Diagram
Component
Subnet
A Subnet refers to the IP address range of a VPC. Depending on the purpose, use a General Subnet to create Subnets for Public or Private use. It is a service that lets users segment the network within a VPC to match their purpose and scale. Subnet provides a regular Subnet and a Local Subnet for communication between servers.
General Subnet Creation/Query/Deletion: When creating a VPC, a Subnet is created by default and can be used according to its purpose. For example, you can separate and use a Public Subnet that can access the Internet and a Private Subnet that cannot.
VPC Endpoint Subnet Create/Read/Delete: Access to the Samsung Cloud Platform is possible via a private connection from an external network linked to the VPC, enabling entry into the VPC.
Local Subnet Creation/Query/Deletion: It does not allow connections to other subnets or external access, and only permits direct connections between Virtual Server-Virtual Server or Bare Metal Server-Bare Metal Server, so it can be configured only for Virtual Server-Virtual Server communication within the VPC.
Subnet types
It denotes a Sub_network, an IP address space subdivided into smaller units for use in an IP network. Subnet types are divided based on how routing for the Subnet is configured.
| type | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Public Subnet | A Subnet that can access the internet can be configured using a General Subnet. |
| Private Subnet | A Subnet that cannot access the internet can be configured using a General Subnet. |
| VPC Endpoint Subnet | Subnet configuration that can be used for a VPC Endpoint |
| Local Subnet | Configure a subnet that cannot connect to other subnets or external networks. |
Internet Gateway
Create an Internet Gateway to connect it to a VPC, view its details, or delete an unused Internet Gateway. You can use an Internet Gateway to connect VPC resources to the Internet.
You can assign a Public IP to instances and load balancers that are connected to the internet, allowing external access.
NAT Gateway
You can create a NAT Gateway, connect it to a subnet, view its details, or delete an unused NAT Gateway.
To create a NAT Gateway for a subnet, you must first create an Internet Gateway and attach it to the VPC. When you create a NAT Gateway, internet access is allowed for all resources in the subnet. To restrict internet access, apply firewall rules.
A NAT Gateway can be created for the General type, and it is a service that maps a single representative public IP to a Virtual Server without a public IP NAT for outbound internet usage.
Public IP
If you want to use the same IP address each time you stop and start an instance, reserve a Public IP and use it.
This is a service that creates a desired public IP within the available Public IP Pool of Samsung Cloud Platform and assigns it to compute resources for use.
Compute resources assigned with the designated public IP will not have their IP changed even after reboot.
Port
Provides a connection point to attach a single device, such as a server’s NIC, to the network. This enables adding additional NICs beyond the default provision.
VPC Endpoint
Provides an entry point for the VPC that enables access to the Samsung Cloud Platform via a private connection from an external network connected to the VPC.
VPC Peering
You can communicate via IP through a 1:1 private route between VPCs. By default, peering is provided between VPCs in the same account, and only one connection is allowed between different accounts.
Private NAT
From compute resources within the VPC, you can use Direct Connect to map the customer’s IP and establish a connection.
Transit Gateway
Transit Gateway is a gateway service that easily connects the customer’s network with the Samsung Cloud Platform network and serves as a connection hub for multiple VPCs within the cloud environment.
Through the Transit Gateway, you can configure a variety of network topologies that meet customer requirements. Additionally, it provides independent firewall configurations and routing capabilities for each connected network segment, enabling thorough security management.
PrivateLink
It is a service that connects internal Samsung Cloud Platform data to a private path between the VPC and the SCP service without exposing it to the internet.
- PrivateLink Service is for service providers, and PrivateLink Endpoint is for service users.
Constraints
Samsung Cloud Platform’s VPC limits the number of VPCs and subnets that can be created as follows.
| Category | Default quota | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| VPC | 5 | Default VPC creation limit per account |
| VPC IP range | 6 | Number of IP range creation limits per VPC (default 1 + additional 5) |
| VPC Peering | 5 | VPC Peering creation limit per account |
| Subnet | 3 | Maximum number of default subnets per VPC |
| Private NAT | 3 | Default Private NAT creation limit per VPC |
| Transit Gateway | 3 | Maximum number of Transit Gateways per account |
| Transit Gateway connection from VPC | 5 | Maximum number of VPC connections per Transit Gateway (only the same account can be connected) |
Prior Service
VPC has no prerequisite services.
1.1.1 - ServiceWatch Metrics
VPC - Internet Gateway sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by default monitoring are data collected at 5‑minute intervals.
Basic Metrics
Internet Gateway
The following are the basic metrics for the Internet Gateway namespace.
The indicators whose names are shown in bold below are the indicators selected as major indicators among the basic indicators provided by Internet Gateway. Key metrics are used to configure service dashboards that are automatically built for each service in ServiceWatch.
Each metric provides guidance in the user guide on which statistical value is meaningful to query, and among the meaningful statistics, the values displayed in bold text are the primary statistics. In the service dashboard, primary metrics can be viewed using the primary statistical values.
| Performance items | Detailed description | unit | Meaningful statistics |
|---|---|---|---|
| Network In Total Bytes_Internet | Cumulative traffic volume from Internet Gateway → VPC | Bytes |
|
| Network Out Total Bytes _Internet | Cumulative traffic volume heading from VPC → Internet Gateway | Bytes |
|
| Network In Total Bytes _Internet_Delta | Cumulative traffic volume over 5 minutes from Internet Gateway → VPC (Internet) | Bytes |
|
| Network Out Total Bytes _Internet_Delta | Cumulative traffic volume over 5 minutes from VPC → Internet Gateway (Internet) | Bytes |
|
1.2 - How-to guides
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the VPC service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create VPC
You can create and use a VPC service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create a VPC, follow these steps.
Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
On the Service Home page, click the Create VPC button. You will be taken to the Create VPC page.
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category RequiredDetailed description VPC name Required Name of the VPC to create - Enter using English letters and numbers, 3 to 20 characters
IP range Required IP range to use - in IP range format
/16 ~ /28enter within the range- Example:
192.168.0.0/24
- Example:
Explanation Select Enter description for VPC Table. VPC Service Information Input Items - Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 can be added per resource
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
Table. VPC additional information input fields
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
- Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the VPC List page.
Check VPC detailed information
The VPC service allows you to view and edit the full list of resources and detailed information. The VPC Details page consists of the Details, IP Range Management, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed VPC information, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the VPC menu. You will be taken to the VPC List page.
- VPC List page, click the resource to view its details. You will be taken to the VPC Detail page.
- VPC Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of the Details, IP Range Management, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description status VPC status - Active: operating normally
- Deleting: deletion in progress
- Creating: creation in progress
- Error: unable to determine current status
- If it persists, contact the registered administrator
Service termination Cancel service button - If you cancel the service, the running service may be terminated immediately, so consider the impact of service interruption thoroughly before proceeding with the cancellation
Table. VPC status information and additional features
- VPC Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of the Details, IP Range Management, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
VPC List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and edit it if necessary.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
|
| Resource Name | VPC name |
| Resource ID | VPC’s unique resource ID |
| constructor | User who created the VPC |
| Creation date | VPC creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who modified the VPC information |
| Modification date and time | Timestamp of VPC information modification |
| VPC name | VPC resource name |
| VPC ID | VPC unique ID |
| External connection | External resource information |
| IP range | VPC IP range |
| description | VPC description
|
IP range management
On the VPC List page, you can view and add the IP range information associated with the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| IP range | Added IP range information |
| Creation date and time | IP range addition timestamp |
| Add IP range | Add IP range
|
When adding an IP range to a VPC, you cannot add it in the following cases.
- IP range currently used in the VPC
- In the VPC peering rule associated with the current VPC, the destination is the address range added to the peer VPC.
- The address range added as a remote destination in the Direct Connect rule linked to the current VPC.
- The address range whose destination was added as remote in the Transit Gateway rule attached to the current VPC.
- The NAT IP range currently used by the Private NAT attached to the VPC
tag
On the VPC List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the VPC List page.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Terminate VPC
You can terminate unused VPCs to reduce operating costs.
- A VPC cannot be deleted if it has associated Subnet, Internet Gateway, or Direct Connect resources.
- You can only terminate when the VPC service status is Acrive or Error.
- If you cancel the service, the currently operating service may be stopped immediately. Proceed with the cancellation only after fully considering the impact of the service interruption.
To terminate the VPC, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the VPC menu. You will be taken to the VPC List page.
- On the VPC List page, select the resource to terminate, and click the Terminate Service button.
- After termination is complete, verify on the VPC List page that the resource has been terminated.
1.2.1 - Subnet
Create Subnet
You can create and use the VPC Subnet service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create a Subnet, follow these steps.
All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. Go to the VPC’s Service Home page.
On the Service Home page, click the Create Subnet button. You will be taken to the Create Subnet page.
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category RequiredDetailed description Subnet type Required Select Subnet type - General: Can configure as Public or Private
- Local: Can be assigned by selecting either Virtual Server or Bare Metal Server
- A Local Subnet is a Subnet for communication only between servers and cannot communicate with the outside
- VPC Endpoint: VPC Endpoint can be configured
VPC name Required Select the VPC to which the subnet will be attached from the list of existing VPCs - Click + Create New to create a VPC and then select it
VPC IP range Select Automatically input the CIDR range of the selected VPC Subnet name Required Subnet name to create - Enter using English letters and numbers, within 3 to 20 characters
IP range Required IP range to use - in IP range format
/16 ~ /28Enter within the range- Example:
192.168.0.0/24
- Example:
- IP ranges cannot overlap with IP ranges (other subnets) already in use within the VPC
Gateway IP Required Display the Gateway IP address of the Subnet - The first IP of the entered IP range is automatically filled in
- Cannot be modified after service creation
Table. Subnet service information input fields - In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category Required statusDetailed description description Selection Enter description for Subnet IP allocation range Selection You can set the range within the IP range to be used - Select either the entire IP range or an individual specification
- Subnet sub-resources receive IP assignments from the entered entire IP range or from the individually specified range set by the user
- When selecting individual specification, enter the starting IP address and the ending IP address
DNS Name Server Selection After selecting Use, enter DNS Name Server IP. Host path Select Use after selection, enter the host path - Enter the destination IP range and Next Hop IP address
- Destination IP ranges must not overlap each other
tag Selection Add Tag - Up to 50 can be added per resource
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
Table. Subnet additional information input fields
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
- After creation is complete, check the created resources on the Subnet List page.
Check Subnet detailed information
The Subnet service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. Subnet Details page consists of Details, Virtual IP Management, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed Subnet information, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- Click the Subnet button on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Subnet List page.
- On the Subnet List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Subnet Details page.
- Subnet Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Virtual IP Management, Tags, Operation History tabs.
Category Detailed description status Subnet status - Creating: Creation in progress
- Active: Operating normally
- Editing: Modification in progress
- Deleting: Deletion in progress
- Failed: State where creation failed
- Error: Current status unknown
- If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
Delete Subnet Subnet Delete Button Table. Subnet status information and additional features
- Subnet Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Virtual IP Management, Tags, Operation History tabs.
Detailed Information
On the Subnet List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
|
| Resource Name | Subnet resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| constructor | User who created the Subnet |
| Creation date | Subnet creation time |
| Editor | User who modified the Subnet information |
| Modification date and time | Subnet information modification timestamp |
| Subnet type | Subnet type |
| VPC name | The VPC to which the subnet belongs |
| Subnet name | Subnet name |
| Subnet ID | Subnet unique ID |
| IP range | Used IP range |
| Gateway IP | Gateway IP address of the Subnet |
| DHCP IP | the second IP address among the used IP ranges
|
| description | Subnet additional description
|
| IP allocation range | IP allocation range |
| DNS Name Server | Use DNS Name Server |
| Host path | Host route (destination IP range, Next Hop IP address) information |
Virtual IP Management
Subnet List page lets you view the virtual IP information of the selected resource, and you can reserve or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Virtual IP reservation | Virtual IP usage reservation |
| Virtual IP | Virtual IP information
|
| Public Nat IP | Public NAT IP information |
| Number of connected ports | Number of ports connected to the IP |
| Reservation date and time | Virtual IP reservation date and time |
| Return | Virtual IP Return button
|
- If a Port or NAT IP is attached to a Virtual IP, it cannot be returned. Delete the attached resources first.
- You can return the Virtual IP only when the Subnet status is Active or Error.
tag
On the Subnet List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
On the Sunnet List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Managing Virtual IP
You can reserve or manage Virtual IPs for use in a Subnet.
Reserve Virtual IP
You can reserve a Virtual IP for use in the Subnet.
To reserve a Virtual IP, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- Click the Subnet button on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Subnet List page.
- On the Subnet list page, click the resource to reserve a Virtual IP. You will be taken to the Subnet details page.
- On the Subnet Details page, click the Virtual IP Management tab. You will be taken to the Virtual IP Management tab page.
- On the Virtual IP Management tab page, click the Virtual IP Reservation button. The Virtual IP reservation window opens.
- In the Virtual IP Reservation window, set the detailed items and click OK.
- Virtual IP: If you select Auto-Generated, an automatically generated IP will be reserved, and if you select Input, you can reserve an IP that you manually entered.
- Description: Enter additional description for Virtual IP.
- When the reservation confirmation window appears, click Confirm.
Check Virtual IP detailed information
You can view detailed information about the Virtual IP.
To view detailed information about the Virtual IP, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Subnet button. You will be taken to the Subnet List page.
- Subnet list page, click the resource to reserve a Virtual IP. Subnet details page will be displayed.
- On the Subnet Details page, click the Virtual IP Management tab. You will be taken to the Virtual IP Management tab page.
- Click the resource to view on the Virtual IP Management tab page. You will be taken to the Virtual IP Details page.
- *Virtual IP Details The page displays the connected ports and detailed information.
Category Detailed description Virtual IP Virtual IP address Public NAT IP Public NAT IP address and status - Edit icon can be clicked to edit
- Enable after setting, you can select an existing IP or create one to add
- Public NAT IP cannot be modified after configuration; changes require reconfiguration
Connection Port Port information connected to the Virtual IP - Add button to click to add a connected port, you can add by connecting an existing port or creating a new one
- Delete button to click to remove the connected port
Explanation Virtual IP description - Click the Edit icon to modify
constructor User who reserved a Virtual IP Creation date Virtual IP reservation date and time Editor User who modified the Virtual IP information Modification date Date and time the Virtual IP information was modified Table. Virtual IP detailed information items
- *Virtual IP Details The page displays the connected ports and detailed information.
Terminate Subnet
You can delete an unused Subnet.
- You cannot cancel the service if there are connected resources. Delete the connected resources first.
- You can delete a service only when its status is Active or Error.
- Because data cannot be recovered after a service is deleted, be sure to fully consider the impact before proceeding with a Subnet deletion.
To delete a Subnet, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Subnet menu. You will be taken to the Subnet List page.
- On the Subnet List page, click the resource to delete. Navigate to the Subnet Details page.
- On the Subnet Details page, click the Delete button.
- After deletion is complete, check the Subnet list to confirm that the resource has been removed.
Preliminary Service
This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service for details and prepare in advance.
| Service Category | Service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Networking | VPC | A service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment |
1.2.2 - Port
Create Port
You can create and use a Port service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create a port, follow these steps.
Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC Service Home page.
On the Service Home page, click the Create Port button. You will be taken to the Create Port page.
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category RequiredDetailed description VPC name Required Select the VPC to create the Port - Click + Create New to create the VPC and then select it
Subnet name Required Select the Subnet to create the Port - Click + Create New to create a Subnet and then select it
Port name Required Port name that is easy to identify - Enter using English letters, numbers,
-within 3 to 20 characters
IP allocation method Required Select IP allocation method - Automatic allocation: IP is automatically assigned within the IP allocation range of the Subnet
- Manual entry: The entered IP is assigned within the Subnet’s range
- When Manual entry is selected, enter the IP address to use for the Port in Fixed IP address
Explanation Selection Enter description for Port Security Group Select When Use is selected, you can select up to 5 Security Groups. Table. Port service information input fields - Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 can be added per resource
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key and Value values
Table. Port additional information input fields
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
- After creation is complete, check the created resources on the Port List page.
Check detailed information of Port
The Port service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. Port Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed port information, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Go to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Port menu. You will be taken to the Port List page.
- Port List page, click the resource (Port name) to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Port Details page.
- Port Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Category Detailed description status Port status - Active: Operating normally
- Down: Not connected to the resource, or connected but not functioning
- Error: Current status cannot be determined
- If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
Delete Port Button to delete the port Table. Port status information and additional functions
- Port Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Detailed Information
On the Port list page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
|
| Resource Name | Port resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Resource ID | Port’s unique resource ID |
| constructor | User who created the Port |
| Creation date and time | Port creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who modified the port information |
| Modification date and time | Date and time the port information was modified |
| Port name | Port resource name |
| Port ID | Port resource ID |
| Subnet name | Click the connected Subnet name or Subnet entry to go to the detail page. |
| Connected resources | Connected device information |
| Static IP | Static IP information |
| MAC address | MAC address information |
| Explanation | Description of the Port
|
| Security Group | Connected Security Group information
|
| Virtual IP | Connected Virtual IP information |
tag
Port list page allows you to view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
On the Port list page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Delete Port
You can release unused ports to reduce operating costs.
- If there are connected resources such as Virtual Server or PrivateLink, you cannot delete the service. Delete the connected resources first.
- After deleting a service, the running service may be stopped immediately. Consider the impact of deleting the service thoroughly before proceeding with the deletion.
To delete a Port, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Go to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Port menu. You will be taken to the Port List page.
- On the Port List page, click the resource (Port name) you want to delete. You will be taken to the Port Detail page.
- On the Port Details page, click the Delete Port button.
- After the deletion is complete, check whether the resource has been removed from the Port list.
Preliminary Service
This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.
| Service Category | Service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Networking | VPC | A service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment |
1.2.3 - Internet Gateway
Create Internet Gateway
You can create and use the Internet Gateway service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create an Internet Gateway, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Internet Gateway Creation button. You will be taken to the Internet Gateway Creation page.
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category RequiredDetailed description VPC name Required Select the VPC that connects to the Internet Gateway - Click + New to create a VPC and then select it
Category Required Select Internet Gateway type - Choose from Dedicated Internet Gateway, Secured Internet Gateway, Group Gateway
Internet Gateway name Selection Automatically create IGW_{VPC name} Explanation Select Enter a description of the Internet Gateway Use firewall Select Select whether to use the firewall Whether to save firewall logs Select Select whether to save Firewall logs - When using the Firewall, save connection logs
- For more details, see Using Firewall Log Saving
Table. Internet Gateway Service Information Input Items - In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category Required statusDetailed description Tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 can be added per resource
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
Table. Internet Gateway additional information input fields
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
- Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
- Once creation is complete, check the created resource on the Internet Gateway List page.
Internet Gateway Check detailed information
The Internet Gateway service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. Internet Gateway Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed information about the Internet Gateway, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. You will be taken to the VPC Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Internet Gateway menu. Navigate to the Internet Gateway list page.
- On the Internet Gateway List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Internet Gateway Details page.
- Internet Gateway Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description status Internet Gateway status - Creating: Creating resource
- Ative: Normal connection status
- Deleting: Deletion in progress
- Error: Unable to determine current status
- If it persists, contact the registered administrator
Delete Internet Gateway Internet Gateway Delete Button Table. Internet Gateway status information and additional features
- Internet Gateway Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
On the Internet Gateway List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
|
| Resource Name | Internet Gateway resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| constructor | User who created the Internet Gateway |
| Creation date and time | Internet Gateway creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who modified the Internet Gateway information |
| Modification date and time | Date and time the Internet Gateway information was modified |
| Internet Gateway name | Internet Gateway name |
| Internet Gateway ID | Internet Gateway resource ID |
| VPC name | VPC name |
| VPC name | VPC ID |
| Category | Internet Gateway type |
| description | Description of Internet Gateway
|
| Firewall name | Clicking the Firewall takes you to the detail page. |
| Use Fireawall | Use firewall |
| NAT Gateway | Clicking NAT Gateway navigates to the detail page |
| Whether to save NAT logs | NAT log storage
|
tag
Internet Gateway list page lets you view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
On the Internet Gateway List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Managing Internet Gateway Resources
You can manage resources, such as enabling Internet Gateway log storage.
Using NAT Log Storage
To store NAT logs, first create a bucket in Object Storage for log storage and configure that bucket in the NAT Logging log repository. Then, when you enable log storage in the NAT detail view, NAT logs will begin to be saved to the Object Storage bucket. The log repository settings can be verified in NAT Logging. For more information, see NAT Logging.
- If you configure a log repository, Object Storage charges for log storage will be applied.
To use NAT log storage, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Internet Gateway menu. Navigate to the Internet Gateway List page.
- On the Internet Gateway List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Internet Gateway Details page.
- Click the Modify NAT log storage setting button. You will be taken to the Modify NAT log storage setting popup.
- Modify NAT Log Storage Setting In the popup window, select Use for the log repository, and click the Confirm button.
Do not use NAT log storage
To use NAT log storage, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Internet Gateway menu. You will be taken to the Internet Gateway List page.
- Internet Gateway List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Internet Gateway Details page.
- Click the Modify NAT log storage setting button. You will be taken to the Modify NAT log storage setting popup.
- Modify NAT log storage setting In the popup window, deselect Use for the log storage, and click the Confirm button.
- Notification Check the message in the popup window and click the Confirm button.
Delete Internet Gateway
- NAT Gateway, Firewall rules, VPN, etc. If there are connected resources, you cannot terminate the service. Delete the connected resources first.
- After deleting the service, internet communication for resources under the VPC will be interrupted. Proceed with the deletion only after fully considering the impact of deleting the Internet Gateway.
To delete an Internet Gateway, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Internet Gateway menu. You will be taken to the Internet Gateway List page.
- On the Internet Gateway List page, click the resource you want to delete. Navigate to the Internet Gateway Details page.
- On the Internet Gateway Details page, click the Delete button.
- After the deletion is complete, verify that the resource has been removed from the Internet Gateway list.
Pre-service
This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service for details and prepare in advance.
| Service Category | Service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Networking | VPC | A service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment |
1.2.4 - NAT Gateway
Creating NAT Gateway
You can create and use the NAT Gateway service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create a NAT Gateway, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Create NAT Gateway button. You will be taken to the Create NAT Gateway page.
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category RequiredDetailed description VPC name Required Select the VPC to connect - + Create new to create a VPC and then select it
Subnet name Required Select the connected Subnet - Click + Create New to create a Subnet and then select it
NAT Gateway name Select Create NAT_GW_{subnet name} IP for NAT Gateway Required Select a Public IP for NAT Gateway - + New Click to create an IP and then select it
description Select Enter a description for the NAT Gateway Table. NAT Gateway Service Information Input Items - Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information Input area.
Category Whether requiredDetailed description Tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 can be added per resource
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key and Value values
Table. NAT Gateway additional information input fields
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
- In the Summary panel, review the detailed information and estimated billing amount, then click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, verify the created resource on the NAT Gateway list page.
Check NAT Gateway detailed information
The NAT Gateway service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. NAT Gateway Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Go to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the NAT Gateway menu. You will be taken to the NAT Gateway List page.
- On the NAT Gateway List page, click the resource whose details you want to view. You will be taken to the NAT Gateway Details page.
- NAT Gateway Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description status NAT Gateway status - Creating: Creation in progress
- Active: Operating normally
- Deleting: Deletion in progress
Delete NAT Gateway Button to terminate the service - Terminate the NAT Gateway when there are no connected services
- Since terminating the service may cause the running service to stop immediately, proceed with the termination only after fully considering the impact of service interruption
Table. NAT Gateway status information and additional features
- NAT Gateway Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
NAT Gateway List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and modify it if necessary.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
|
| Resource name | NAT Gateway resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| constructor | User who created the NAT Gateway |
| Creation Timestamp | NAT Gateway creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who modified NAT Gateway information |
| Modification date and time | Date and time the NAT Gateway information was modified |
| NAT Gateway name | NAT Gateway name |
| NAT Gateway ID | NAT Gateway resource ID |
| VPC name | VPC name connected to NAT Gateway
|
| VPC ID | VPC resource ID connected to the NAT Gateway |
| Subnet name | Subnet name connected to NAT Gateway
|
| Subnet ID | Subnet resource ID connected to the NAT Gateway |
| Subnet IP range | Subnet IP range information |
| IP for NAT Gateway | NAT Gateway IP information |
| description | Description of NAT Gateway
|
tag
NAT Gateway List page lets you view, add, modify, or delete the tag information of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the NAT Gateway List page.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Delete NAT Gateway
To delete a NAT Gateway, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Go to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the NAT Gateway menu. Navigate to the NAT Gateway List page.
- Click the resource to view detailed information on the NAT Gateway List page. You will be taken to the NAT Gateway Details page.
- On the NAT Gateway Details page, click the Delete button.
- After deletion is complete, verify that the resource has been removed from the NAT Gateway list.
Pre-service
This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.
| Service Category | Service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Networking | VPC | A service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment |
1.2.5 - Public IP
Create Public IP
You can create and use a Public IP service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create a Public IP, follow these steps.
Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
On the Service Home page, click the Public IP reservation button. You will be taken to the Public IP reservation page.
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description Category Required Select the gateway to reserve the Public IP - Default: Internet Gateway
description Select Enter description for Public IP Table. Public IP Service Information Input Items - In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category Required statusDetailed description Tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 can be added per resource
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key and Value values
Table. Public IP additional information input fields
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
- Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Public IP List page.
View detailed information of Public IP
The Public IP service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. Public IP Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed information about the public IP, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Public IP menu. You will be taken to the Public IP List page.
- On the Public IP List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Public IP Detail page.
- Public IP Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Category Detailed description status Public IP status - Attached: attached state
- Reserved: reserved state
- Error: cannot determine current state
- If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
Return Public IP Public IP Return Button Table. Public IP status information and additional features
- Public IP Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Detailed Information
Public IP List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
|
| Resource name | Public IP resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| constructor | User who created the Public IP |
| Creation date | Public IP creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who modified the Public IP information |
| Modification date and time | Date and time the public IP information was modified |
| IP address | Designated (reserved) IP address |
| Category | Gateway information with reserved Public IP |
| Public IP ID | Public IP resource ID |
| description | Description of Public IP
|
| Connection resource type | Resource information associated with the designated (reserved) IP address |
| Connection resource name | Resource name associated with the designated (reserved) IP address |
tag
On the Public IP List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
On the Public IP List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Return Public IP
To delete a Public IP, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Go to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Public IP button. You will be taken to the Public IP List page.
- On the Public IP List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Public IP Details page.
- On the Public IP Details page, click the Public IP Release button.
- After the return is completed, check whether the resource has been deleted from the Public IP list.
Pre-service
This is a service that must be installed in advance before creating this service. Please refer to the provided user guide and prepare accordingly.
| Service Category | Service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Networking | VPC | It is a service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment. |
1.2.6 - Private NAT
Users can create the Private NAT service by entering the required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Creating Private NAT
You can create a Private NAT service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and use it.
To create a Private NAT, follow these steps.
All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
On the Service Home page, click the Create Private NAT button. 2. Navigate to the Create Private NAT page.
In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category required statusDetailed description Private NAT name Required Enter the Private NAT name - Enter using letters and numbers, 3 to 20 characters
Connection resource type Required Select the connection resource to connect the Private NAT - You can choose between Direct Connect and Transit Gateway
- Transit Gateway can be selected after connecting the uplink line
Connection resource name Essential Display entries of the selected connection resource - Click + New Creation in the list to create a connection resource
NAT IP range Essential Enter the NAT IP range to use - Enter in CIDR format, e.g., 192.168.2.0/23
- Cannot overlap with the connected VPC IP or other Private NAT IP ranges
Explanation Selection Enter description for Private NAT Table. Private NAT Service Information Input ItemsReference- It must not overlap with the IP range of the VPC connected to the selected Direct Connect or Transit Gateway.
- It must not overlap with other Private NAT ranges that are connected to the selected Direct Connect or Transit Gateway.
- It must not overlap with the IP range of the on‑premise network connected to the selected Direct Connect or Transit Gateway.
- Some IP ranges are reserved for management and cannot be used.
Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category Required statusDetailed description Tag Selection Add Tag - Up to 50 per resource can be added
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
Table. Private NAT additional information input fields
Summary Check the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, verify the created resources on the Private NAT List page.
Check Private NAT detailed information
The Private NAT service allows you to view and edit the complete resource list and detailed information. On the Private NAT Details page, it consists of Detail Information, IP Management, Tags, Operation History tabs.
To view detailed information about Private NAT, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > VPC menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Private NAT menu. 2. Go to the Private NAT List page.
- Private NAT List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Navigate to the Private NAT Details page.
- Private NAT Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, IP Management, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Category Detailed description status Private NAT status - Active: Running
- Creating: In progress
- Deleting: In progress
- Error: An error occurred
Delete Private NAT Button to delete Private NAT Table. Private NAT status information and additional features
- Private NAT Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, IP Management, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Detailed Information
Private NAT List page allows you to view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if necessary.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource Name | Private NAT resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Constructor | User who created a Private NAT |
| Creation date and time | Date and time the Private NAT was created |
| Modifier | User who modified the Private NAT information |
| Modification date | Date and time the Private NAT information was modified |
| Private NAT name | Private NAT resource name |
| Connection resource type | Information about resources connected to Private NAT |
| NAT IP range | NAT IP range information in use |
| Connection resource name | Clicking the resource information or resource name linked to the Private NAT navigates to the detailed information page. |
| Explanation | Description of Private NAT
|
IP Management
Private NAT List page allows you to view the Private NAT IP, and you can reserve or release it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Private NAT IP List | Active Private NAT list
|
Tag
On the Private NAT List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
On the Private NAT List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Managing Private NAT IP
You can reserve or release a Private NAT IP.
Reserve Private NAT IP
To reserve a Private NAT IP, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Private NAT menu. 2. Private NAT List Go to the page.
- Private NAT List page, click the resource to reserve an IP. 3. Go to the Private NAT Details page.
- On the Private NAT Details page, click the IP Management tab. 4. Navigate to the IP Management tab page.
- Click the IP Management tab page’s Private NAT IP Reservation button. 5. The Private NAT IP reservation window appears.
- Enter the Private NAT IP to be used in the Private NAT IP reservation window and click the Confirm button. 6. A notification confirmation dialog appears.
- In the alert dialog, click the Confirm button. 7. Check whether a resource entry has been added to the IP list.
Return Private NAT IP
To return the Private NAT IP, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Private NAT menu. 2. Navigate to the Private NAT List page.
- On the Private NAT List page, click the resource to reserve an IP. 3. Go to the Private NAT Details page.
- On the Private NAT Details page, click the IP Management tab. 4. Navigate to the IP Management tab page.
- On the IP Management tab page, click the Return button for the IP item you want to return. 5. A notification confirmation dialog appears.
- Verify that the selected resource has been deleted from the IP list.
Delete Private NAT
You can cancel unused Private NAT to reduce operating costs.
To cancel Private NAT, follow the steps below.
- All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Private NAT menu. 2. Go to the Private NAT List page.
- On the Private NAT List page, click the resource to delete. 3. Go to the Private NAT Details page.
- On the Private NAT Details page, click the Delete Private NAT button.
- After termination is complete, check whether the resource has been deleted from the Private NAT list.
Preliminary service
This service must be installed in advance before creating this service. Please prepare by referring to the user guide provided in advance.
| Service Category | service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Networking | VPC | A service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment |
| Networking | Direct Connect | A service that securely and quickly connects the customer’s network with the Samsung Cloud Platform environment. |
1.2.7 - VPC Endpoint
Create VPC Endpoint
You can create and use a VPC Endpoint service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create a VPC Endpoint, follow these steps.
Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Go to the VPC’s Service Home page.
On the Service Home page, click the Create VPC Endpoint button. You will be taken to the Create VPC Endpoint page.
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category Required statusDetailed description VPC name Required Select the VPC to create the Endpoint - Click + Create new to create a VPC and then select it
Usage > Target Service Required Select the target service for which to create the VPC Endpoint Purpose > Connected Resources Required Select the resource to create a VPC Endpoint VPC Endpoint name Required Enter the VPC Endpoint name - Enter using letters and numbers, 3 ~ 20 characters
VPC Endpoint IP > Subnet name Required Select VPC Endpoint Subnet - + Create New Click to create a Subnet and then select it
VPC Endpoint IP > IP Required Enter the IP to be used for the VPC Endpoint - Example:
192.168.x.x
description Select Enter a description for the VPC Endpoint Table. VPC Endpoint Service Information Input Items - Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information Input area.
Category Whether requiredDetailed description tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 can be added per resource
- Add Tag button after clicking, input or select Key, Value values
Table. VPC Endpoint additional information input fieldsReferenceAfter registering the VPC Endpoint, you need to configure the Direct Connect firewall to integrate internal services of the Samsung Cloud Platform. Refer to the port information for each service and register the firewall rules.
Service Port information DNS TCP 53, UDP 53 Object Storage TCP 8080, 8443, 80, 443, 4430 File Storage (NFS) TCP/UDP common 111, 300, 302, 304, 2049, 635, 4045, 4046, 4049
(CIFS) UDP 135, 137, 138, 389 / TCP 135, 139, 445, 40001Container Registry (authentication server, Registry) TCP 443 Table: Allowed ports per target service
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Summary Verify the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, then click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, check the created resources on the VPC Endpoint List page.
Check VPC Endpoint details
The VPC Endpoint service allows you to view and edit the full list of resources and detailed information. VPC Endpoint Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Endpoint To view detailed information, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Go to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- Click the VPC Endpoint menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the VPC Endpoint List page.
- On the VPC Endpoint List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be taken to the VPC Endpoint Details page.
- VPC Endpoint Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description status VPC Endpoint status - Active: operating normally
- Creating: creation in progress
- Deleting: deleting resource connection
- Deleted: resource connection deleted
Delete VPC Endpoint Button to delete the VPC Endpoint connection resource Table. VPC Endpoint status information and additional features
- VPC Endpoint Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
VPC Endpoint List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
|
| Resource name | VPC Endpoint resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| constructor | User who created the VPC Endpoint |
| Creation date and time | VPC Endpoint creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who modified the VPC Endpoint information |
| Modification date | Date and time the VPC Endpoint information was modified |
| VPC Endpoint name | VPC Endpoint name |
| VPC name | Click the connected VPC name or VPC item to go to the detail page. |
| VPC ID | Connected VPC ID |
| Target Service | Connected target information |
| Connection resource information | Connected resource information |
| Subnet name | Endpoint subnet information; click the subnet item to navigate to the detail page. |
| VPC Endpoint IP | VPC Endpoint IP information |
| description | Description of VPC Endpoint
|
tag
On the VPC Endpoint List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
VPC Endpoint List page allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Delete VPC Endpoint
You can cancel unused Endpoints to reduce operating costs.
- If there are connected resources such as Object Storage, Container Registry, you cannot cancel the service. Delete the connected resources first.
- Deleting a VPC Endpoint can cause the running service to stop immediately. Carefully consider the impact of deleting the service before proceeding with the deletion.
To terminate a VPC Endpoint, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- Click the VPC Endpoint menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the VPC Endpoint List page.
- On the VPC Endpoint List page, click the resource you want to delete. You will be taken to the VPC Endpoint Details page.
- On the VPC Endpoint Details page, click the Delete Endpoint button.
- When the termination is complete, check whether the resource has been deleted from the VPC Endpoint list.
Pre-service
This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service for details and prepare in advance.
| Service Category | Service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Networking | VPC | A service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment |
| Networking | Direct Connect | A service that securely and quickly connects the customer’s network to the Samsung Cloud Platform |
1.2.8 - VPC Peering
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the VPC Peering service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create VPC Peering
You can create and use the VPC Peering service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create a VPC Peering, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Create VPC Peering button. You will be taken to the Create VPC Peering page.
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description VPC Peering name Required Enter VPC Peering name - Enter using letters and numbers, 3~20 characters
Requested VPC name Required Select the VPC to request VPC Peering - Click + New in the list to create a VPC
Approved Account Required Select the account of the VPC to approve VPC peering, then select that VPC or enter its information - Same account: select the approved VPC name
- Click + New creation in the list to create a VPC
- Different account: enter the approved Account ID and approved VPC ID
description Select Enter a description of VPC Peering Table. VPC Peering service information input items - In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category Whether requiredDetailed description Tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 can be added per resource
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key and Value values
Table. VPC Peering additional information input fields
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
- Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the Summary panel, and click the Create button.
- When connecting a VPC from another Account, the peering proceeds after an approval process, so the connection may take some time.
- When creation is complete, check the created resource on the VPC Peering List page.
Check VPC Peering details
The VPC Peering service allows you to view and edit the full list of resources and detailed information. VPC Peering Details page consists of Details, Rules, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed VPC Peering information, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the VPC Peering menu. You will be taken to the VPC Peering List page.
- VPC Peering List Click the resource to view detailed information on the page. You will be taken to the VPC Peering Details page.
- VPC Peering Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Rules, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description status VPC Peering status - Active: operational
- Requesting: connection or deletion request in progress
- Creating: connecting
- Creating Requesting: connection request in progress
- Deleting Requesting: deletion request in progress
- Editing: editing
- Rejected: rejected
- Canceled: canceled
- Error: error occurred
- If it persists, contact the registered administrator
VPC Peering deletion/VPC Peering deletion request Button to request deletion of VPC Peering resources - Cancel Connection Request: Can cancel if a VPC Peering connection was requested
- Approve Connection: Can approve when a VPC Peering connection request is received
- Reject Connection: Click to reject the connection
- Cancel Deletion Request: Can cancel if a VPC Peering deletion was requested
- Approve Deletion: Can approve when a VPC Peering deletion request is received
- Reject Deletion: Click to reject the deletion
- Reapproval Request: Request reapproval when VPC approval was denied
Table. VPC Peering status information and additional features
- VPC Peering Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Rules, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
VPC Peering List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and edit it if needed.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | VPC Peering resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| constructor | User who created the VPC Peering |
| Creation date | Timestamp of VPC Peering creation |
| Editor | User who modified the VPC Peering information |
| Modification date and time | Timestamp of VPC Peering information modification |
| VPC Peering name | VPC Peering name |
| Request information | The VPC name and VPC ID information of the VPC that requested VPC Peering, clicking the VPC name navigates to the detail information page
|
| Approval information | The VPC name and VPC ID of the VPC that approved the VPC peering; clicking the VPC name takes you to the detail page
|
| Explanation | Description of VPC Peering
|
rule
VPC Peering List page lets you view the rules associated with the selected resource, and add or remove them.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| List of rules | Connected Rules List
|
tag
VPC Peering List page allows you to view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the VPC Peering List page.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Managing VPC Peering Rules
You can add or delete rules for VPC Peering.
Add Rule
- You can add rules only when the VPC peering status is Active.
- If you enter the destination IP incorrectly in the routing configuration, communication failures may occur. Verify the destination IP information once more before creating the rule.
To add a rule to VPC Peering, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- Click the VPC Peering menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the VPC Peering List page.
- On the VPC Peering List page, click the resource to delete. Navigate to the VPC Peering Details page.
- On the VPC Peering Details page, click the Rules tab. You will be taken to the Rules tab page.
- On the Rule tab page, click the Add Rule button. The Add Rule dialog appears.
- Enter the origin and destination in the rule addition window and click the Confirm button. A notification confirmation window will appear.
- It must not duplicate an already entered rule.
- You can enter within the IP address range of the destination VPC.
- It should be entered the same as the subnet range.
- The destination IP range 0.0.0.0/0 cannot be used.
- Click the Confirm button in the notification dialog. Verify that the resource entry has been added to the rule list.
Delete Rule
- You can delete the connected rules only when the VPC Peering service status is ACtive or Error.
- If the status of the linked rule is Creating or Deleting, it cannot be deleted.
To delete a VPC Peering rule, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Go to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the VPC Peering menu. You will be taken to the VPC Peering List page.
- On the VPC Peering List page, click the resource you want to delete. Navigate to the VPC Peering Details page.
- VPC Peering Details page, click the Rules tab. You will be taken to the Rules tab page.
- Rule tab page, click the Delete button of the item to delete. A notification confirmation dialog appears.
- Click the Confirm button in the alert dialog. Verify that the selected resource in the rule list has been deleted.
Terminate VPC Peering
You can terminate unused VPC Peering to reduce operating costs.
- If a rule is attached to the VPC Peering, you cannot terminate the service. Delete all attached rules before terminating the service.
- You can only terminate the VPC Peering service when its status is Active, Rejected, Canceled, or Error.
Terminate VPC Peering of the same Account
To terminate a VPC peering within the same account, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- Click the VPC Peering menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the VPC Peering List page.
- On the VPC Peering List page, click the resource to delete. Navigate to the VPC Peering Details page.
- On the VPC Peering Details page, click the VPC Peering Delete button.
- After termination is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted from the VPC Peering list.
Terminate VPC Peering connected to another account
To terminate a VPC peering connected to another account, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- Click the VPC Peering menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the VPC Peering List page.
- On the VPC Peering List page, click the resource you want to delete. You will be taken to the VPC Peering Details page.
- On the VPC Peering Details page, click the VPC Peering Delete Request button.
- Once the cancellation is complete, verify that the resource has been removed from the VPC Peering list.
- The deletion request must be approved by the counterpart account for the termination to be processed correctly.
Pre-service
This is a service that must be installed in advance before creating this service. Please refer to the provided user guide and prepare accordingly.
| Service Category | Service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Networking | VPC | A service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment |
1.2.9 - Transit Gateway
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Transit Gateway service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create Transit Gateway
You can create and use the Transit Gateway service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create a Transit Gateway, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Create Transit Gateway button. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway creation page.
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category Required statusDetailed description Transit Gateway name Required Enter the Transit Gateway name - Enter using letters and numbers, 3 to 20 characters
Explanation Selection Enter description for Transit Gateway Table: Transit Gateway service information input fields - Additional Information Input area, please enter or select the required information.
Category required statusDetailed description tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 per resource can be added
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
Table. Transit Gateway additional information input fields
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
- Summary Check the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
- Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Transit Gateway List page.
Check Transit Gateway Details
The Transit Gateway service lets you view and modify the complete resource list and detailed information. In the Transit Gateway Details page, it is composed of Details, Connected VPC Management, Rules, Tags, Activity History tabs.
To view the detailed information of the Transit Gateway, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
- On the Transit Gateway List page, click the resource to view its detailed information. 3. Go to the Transit Gateway Details page.
- Transit Gateway Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of the Details, Connected VPC Management, Rules, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description status Transit Gateway status - Active: Running
- Creating: In progress
- Editing: In progress
- Deleting: In progress
- Error: An error occurred
Delete Transit Gateway Button to delete Transit Gateway resources Table. Transit Gateway status information and additional features
- Transit Gateway Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of the Details, Connected VPC Management, Rules, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
On the Transit Gateway list page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and, if necessary, edit the information.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | Transit Gateway resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Constructor | User who created the Transit Gateway |
| Creation date and time | Transit Gateway creation time |
| Modifier | User who modified the Transit Gateway information |
| Modification date | Date and time the Transit Gateway information was modified |
| Transit Gateway name | Transit Gateway resource name |
| Use Uplink | Uplink information connected to the Transit Gateway
|
| Explanation | Description of the Transit Gateway
|
| Firewall connection status | Firewall connection management and status display
|
Connected VPC Management
Transit Gateway list page allows you to view the VPCs connected to the selected resource, and to add or delete them.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| VPC list | Connected VPC list
|
Rule
On the Transit Gateway list page, you can view the rules attached to the selected resource, and add or delete them.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Rule List | Connected Rules List
|
Tag
On the Transit Gateway list page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
Transit Gateway list page allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Manage Transit Gateway integration services
You can request, modify, and cancel the Uplink and Firewall connection services required to use the Transit Gateway service.
To request the Transit Gateway integration service, follow the steps below.
- All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
- On the Transit Gateway List page, click the resource you want to delete. 3. Go to the Transit Gateway Details page.
- On the Transit Gateway Details page, click Linked Services (IGW, BM VPC), Quick Access to Line Request/Modification/Termination. 4. Navigate to the service request page.
- On the Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
Input field Detailed description Title Enter the title of the service request - Example: TGW Uplink circuit request
Region Select the location of Samsung Cloud Platform - Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
service Select service category and service - Service Category: Networking
- Service: Transit Gateway
Task classification Select the type you want to request - TGW Uplink line request/modification/termination: After selecting the work type, enter detailed information in the service request category field
content Fill in the detailed items of the service request form - Service request type: manually enter one of Apply / Modify / Terminate
- Account name/ID: Enter the account name and ID
- Transit Gateway name/ID: Enter the created Transit Gateway name and ID
- Applicant information: Enter applicant’s email, phone number, etc.
- Service request task type: Choose and enter either Uplink line connection or BM VPC Firewall connection
- Firewall usage: Enter whether the firewall is used
Attachment If you have additional files you want to share, proceed with the upload - Attached files can be up to 5 files, each within 5 MB
- Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files can be attached
Table. Linked Service Creation Request Items - On the service request page, click the Request button.
- After the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
- When the service request operation is completed, you can view the requested resources on the Transit Gateway Details page.
VPC connection for BareMetal
- VPC Peering does not support firewalls.
- When you cannot use a Security Group, such as with BareMetal, you can configure VPC Peering using a Transit Gateway firewall.
- However, in a peered BM VPC, communication via UpLink (external) is not possible, and it cannot be connected to a Transit Gateway together with other VM VPCs.
Managing VPC connections of the Transit Gateway
You can add or remove VPCs on a Transit Gateway.
Add VPC connection
To add a VPC attachment to a Transit Gateway, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
- Transit Gateway List page, click the resource you want to delete. 3. Navigate to the Transit Gateway Details page.
- On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Connected VPC Management tab. 4. Navigate to the Connected VPC Management tab page.
- On the Connected VPC Management tab page, click the Add VPC Connection button. 5. The VPC connection addition window appears.
- In the Add VPC Connection window, select the VPC and click the Confirm button. 6. A notification confirmation window appears.
- Click +New in the list to create a VPC and select it.
- In the alert confirmation dialog, click the Confirm button. 7. Check whether a resource entry has been added in the VPC connection list.
Delete VPC connection
To delete a Transit Gateway’s VPC attachment, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
- On the Transit Gateway List page, click the resource you want to delete. 3. Go to the Transit Gateway Details page.
- On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Connected VPC Management tab. 4. Navigate to the Connected VPC Management tab page.
- On the Connected VPC Management tab page, click the Delete button for the item you want to delete. 5. A notification confirmation window appears.
- In the alert dialog, click the Confirm button. 6. Verify whether the selected resource has been deleted from the VPC connection list.
Managing Transit Gateway rules
You can add or delete rules in the Transit Gateway.
Add rule
- You can add rules only when the Transit Gateway service status is Active.
- If the destination IP is entered incorrectly in the routing configuration, communication failures may occur. * Please double-check the destination IP information before creating the rule.
Transit Gateway must complete both routing rule registration and firewall rule registration to operate correctly.
- Register routing rule
- Rule 1: Register VPC - Transit Gateway rule
- Rule 2: VPC - Uplink rule registration (when connecting Uplink line)
- Register firewall rule
- Add a Transit Gateway firewall and add the firewall purpose (e.g., TGW Uplink, TGW BM VPC, etc.).
Next, select the firewall from the firewall product list and register the rule. (When adding a firewall purpose, default set to All/deny)
- Add a Transit Gateway firewall and add the firewall purpose (e.g., TGW Uplink, TGW BM VPC, etc.).
To add a rule to the Transit Gateway, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
- Transit Gateway List page, click the resource you want to delete. 3. Transit Gateway Details Navigate to the page.
- On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Rules tab. 4. Go to the Rules tab page.
- On the Rule tab page, click the Add Rule button. 5. The rule addition window appears.
- In the rule addition window, enter the origin and destination, and click the Confirm button. 6. A notification confirmation dialog appears.
Category Detailed description Rule type Select type for adding Transit Gateway rule - Select from VPC-TGW rule, TGW-Uplink rule
Connected VPC name Select the connected VPC when choosing a VPC‑TGW rule origin When selecting a VPC‑TGW rule, the destination is automatically selected when configured. Destination Select rule destination - When selecting a VPC‑TGW rule, set to either VPC or TGW
- When selecting a TGW‑Uplink rule, set to either TGW or remote
- Cannot register if it duplicates an existing rule; can input up to the x.x.x.x/28 range
Destination IP range Enter the destination IP range to use Table. Rule addition input itemsCaution- VPC-TGW rule When entering, check the following items.
- When the destination is a VPC.
- It can be entered within the VPC IP range.
- It should be entered the same as the subnet range.
- 0.0.0.0/0 cannot be used as the destination IP range.
- When the destination is a Transit Gateway.
- Some IP ranges are reserved for management and cannot be used.
- The VPC IP address range cannot be entered.
- The destination IP range 0.0.0.0/0 can be entered only when the VPC’s Internet Gateway is not attached.
- When the destination is a VPC.
- TGW-Uplink Rule When entering, check the following items.
- When the destination is a Transit Gateway.
- You can enter values within the VPC IP address range connected to the Transit Gateway.
- 0.0.0.0/0 cannot be used as the destination IP range.
- When the destination is remote
- You cannot enter the VPC IP address range connected to the Transit Gateway.
- The destination IP range 0.0.0.0/0 can be entered only when the Transit Gateway does not have an Internet Gateway attached.
- D, E class IP ranges cannot be entered.
- When the destination is a Transit Gateway.
- In the alert dialog, click the Confirm button. 7. Check whether a resource entry has been added in the rule list.
Delete rule
- You can delete the rule only when the Transit Gateway service status is Active.
- If the rule status is Creating or Deleting, the rule cannot be deleted.
To delete a Transit Gateway rule, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Navigate to the Transit Gateway List page.
- On the Transit Gateway List page, click the resource you want to delete. 3. Go to the Transit Gateway Details page.
- On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Rules tab. 4. Navigate to the Rules tab page.
- On the Rules tab page, click the Delete button of the item you want to delete. 5. A notification confirmation window appears.
- In the alert dialog, click the Confirm button. 6. Verify that the selected resource has been deleted from the rule list.
Managing Firewall Connections
You can attach or detach a firewall for use with the Transit Gateway.
Connect to Firewall
To add a Firewall connection to the Transit Gateway, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
- Transit Gateway List page, click the resource to which you will connect the Firewall. 3. Go to the Transit Gateway Details page.
- On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Details tab. 4. Go to the Detailed Information tab page.
- On the Detailed Information tab page, click the Connect Firewall button. 5. A firewall connection confirmation window appears.
- In the Firewall connection confirmation window, click the Confirm button. 6. Check the connection status in the Firewall connection status item.
Add Firewall
After the Firwall connection is completed, you can add a Firewall.
To add a Firewall to a Transit Gateway, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
- Transit Gateway List page, click the resource where you want to add a Firewall. 3. Navigate to the Transit Gateway Details page.
- On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Detailed Information tab. 4. Go to the Detailed Information tab page.
- On the Detailed Information tab page, click the Add button in the Firewall list. 5. The Firewall addition window appears.
- In the Firewall add dialog, select the purpose and click the Confirm button. 6. Check whether a resource item has been added to the Firewall list.
Delete Firewall
You can delete the firewall after the firewall connection is completed.
To delete a firewall from a Transit Gateway, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
- On the Transit Gateway List page, click the resource to delete the firewall. 3. Go to the Transit Gateway Details page.
- On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Details tab. 4. Go to the Detailed Information tab page.
- Click the Delete button on the Detailed Information tab page of the Firewall list. 5. A notification confirmation window appears.
- In the alert dialog, click the Confirm button. 6. Check whether the resource entry has been removed from the Firewall list.
Disconnect Firewall
You can disconnect unused Firewall connections.
To detach the firewall from the Transit Gateway, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
- Transit Gateway list page, click the resource to detach the Firewall connection. 3. Navigate to the Transit Gateway Details page.
- On the Transit Gateway Details page, click the Details tab. 4. Navigate to the Detailed Information tab page.
- On the Detailed Information tab page, click the Disconnect Firewall button. 5. A notification confirmation window appears.
- In the alert dialog, click the Confirm button. 6. Check the disconnected status in the Firewall connection status item.
Terminate Transit Gateway
You can terminate unused Transit Gateways to reduce operating costs.
- You cannot terminate the service if the uplink connected to the Transit Gateway is in use or if a firewall is connected. * After completing the termination request for the connected resource, cancel the service.
- If VPC resources or rules are attached to the Transit Gateway, the service cannot be terminated. * Delete all linked resources and rules, then terminate the service.
- If the Transit Gateway service status is Creating or Deleting, the service cannot be terminated.
To terminate the Transit Gateway, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Transit Gateway menu. 2. Go to the Transit Gateway List page.
- On the Transit Gateway List page, click the resource you want to delete. 3. Go to the Transit Gateway Details page.
- On the Transit Gateway Detail page, click the Transit Gateway Delete button.
- After termination is complete, check whether the resource has been deleted from the Transit Gateway list.
Preliminary service
This is a service that must be installed in advance before creating this service. Please prepare by referring to the user guide provided in advance.
| Service Category | service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Networking | VPC | It is a service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment. |
1.2.10 - PrivateLink Service
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the PrivateLink Service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Creating a PrivateLink Service
You can create and use a PrivateLink Service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create a PrivateLink Service, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the PrivateLink Service Create button. You will be taken to the PrivateLink Service Create page.
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description PrivateLink Service name Required Enter the PrivateLink service name Approval method Required Select approval method for PrivateLink Service input - Automatic: Automatically approve when a PrivateLink Service connection request is received
- Manual: Manually approve after verification when a PrivateLink Service connection request is received
- The approval method cannot be changed after creation
High-speed data transfer Selection The default setting is disabled and not displayed in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console - To use high-speed data transfer, submit a service usage request via Support Center > Contact, and once processing is complete, it can be selected on the screen
VPC name Required Select the VPC to connect - Click + New to create a VPC and then select it
Subnet name Required Select the Subnet of the VPC to connect - Click + New to create a Subnet and then select it
PrivateLink Service IP Required Select the Subnet to connect and enter the PrivateLink Service IP - IP addresses already in use within the Subnet cannot be entered; the first and last IPs of the Subnet IP range cannot be used
Connection resource Required Select resources to connect to the chosen VPC - Load Balancer: Select the Load Balancer to connect (cannot select LB when using a Local subnet)
- IP: Enter the Compute resource IP of the selected VPC
Security Group Select Click the Select button to choose the Security Group to connect - Select up to 5
- If you do not select a Security Group, all connections will be blocked
explanation Select Enter description for PrivateLink Service Table. PrivateLink Service service information input items - In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category Required statusDetailed description tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 per resource can be added
- Add Tag button after clicking, input or select Key, Value values
Table. PrivateLink Service additional information input fields
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
- Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, check the created resource on the PrivateLink Service list page.
PrivateLink product is a service that provides an unidirectional private path (a type of tunnel). The PrivateLink product is used by creating a PrivateLink Service (exit) in the service provider account, creating a PrivateLink Endpoint (entry) in the user account, and then connecting to the PrivateLink Service.
The connection requirements for the PrivateLink product are as follows.
- When creating a PrivateLink Endpoint, you can connect only to the single specified PrivateLink Service per endpoint. (Only one pair of ingress and egress exists)
- Cannot attempt to establish a session to the PrivateLink Endpoint via the PrivateLink Service. (unidirectional)
- In the provider account, when creating a PrivateLink Service, a connection to a single IP is provided by selecting a single LB or by manual entry.
- In a user account, any client that the user account has permitted to access the PrivateLink Endpoint can use the PrivateLink Endpoint.
- It can be used in both General and Local Subnet.
View PrivateLink Service details
The PrivateLink Service allows you to view and edit the full list of resources and detailed information. PrivateLink Service Details page consists of Details, Connection Management, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed information about the PrivateLink Service, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- From the Service Home page, click the PrivateLink Service menu. You will be taken to the PrivateLink Service list page.
- On the PrivateLink Service List page, click the resource for which you want to view details. You will be taken to the PrivateLink Service Details page.
- PrivateLink Service Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connection Management, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Category Detailed description status PrivateLink Service status - Active: Running
- Creating: In progress
- Deleting: In progress
- Error: Error occurred
Delete PrivateLink Service Button to delete PrivateLink Service resources Table. PrivateLink Service status information and additional features
- PrivateLink Service Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connection Management, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Detailed Information
On the PrivateLink Service List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource Name | PrivateLink Service resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| constructor | User who created the PrivateLink Service |
| Creation date and time | PrivateLink Service creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who modified the PrivateLink Service information |
| Modification date and time | Date and time the PrivateLink Service information was modified |
| PrivateLink Service name | PrivateLink Service resource name |
| PrivateLink Service ID | PrivateLink Service ID information |
| connected resource | Connected resources of PrivateLink Service
|
| PrivateLink Service IP | PrivateLink Service IP address |
| VPC name | Connected VPC Information
|
| Subnet name | Connected Subnet information
|
| Port name | Port information of PrivateLink Service
|
| Security Group | Configured Security Group information
|
| Approval method | Approval method for the configured PrivateLink Service |
| High-speed data transmission | Whether to use high-speed data transfer for the configured PrivateLink Service |
| Explanation | Description of the PrivateLink Service
|
Connection Management
On the PrivateLink Service List page, you can view the connection information of the selected resource. You can review connection requests and approve or reject them.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| PrivateLink Service List | PrivateLink Service connection list
|
tag
PrivateLink Service List page lets you view, add, modify, or delete tag information for the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
PrivateLink Service List page allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Terminate PrivateLink Service
You can cancel unused PrivateLink Service to reduce operating costs.
After configuring the Private Endpoint to block or reject connections, delete the PrivateLink Service.
To cancel the PrivateLink Service, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- From the Service Home page, click the PrivateLink Service menu. You will be taken to the PrivateLink Service List page.
- On the PrivateLink Service List page, click the resource to delete. Go to the PrivateLink Service Details page.
- On the PrivateLink Service Details page, click the Delete PrivateLink Service button.
- When the termination is complete, check that the resource has been deleted from the PrivateLink Service list.
Preliminary Service
This is a service that must be installed in advance before creating this service. Please refer to the provided user guide and prepare accordingly.
| Service Category | Service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Networking | VPC | It is a service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment. |
| Networking | Load Balancer | It is a service that distributes server traffic load in a cloud environment. |
1.2.11 - PrivateLink Endpoint
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the PrivateLink Endpoint service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Creating a PrivateLink Endpoint
You can create and use a PrivateLink Endpoint service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create a PrivateLink Endpoint, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Create PrivateLink Endpoint button. You will be taken to the Create PrivateLink Endpoint page.
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category RequiredDetailed description PrivateLink Endpoint name Required Enter the PrivateLink Endpoint name VPC name Required Select VPC to connect - Click + Create new to create a VPC and then select it
Subnet name Required Select the Subnet of the VPC to connect - Click + New to create a Subnet and then select it
PrivateLink Endpoint IP Required Select the Subnet to connect, then enter the PrivateLink Endpoint IP - IP addresses currently in use within the Subnet cannot be entered, and the first and last IPs of the Subnet IP range cannot be used
PrivateLink Endpoint ID Required Enter the PrivateLink Service ID to connect - Enter using letters and numbers, within 3 to 60 characters
- Before applying for the service, you need to verify the Service ID of the PrivateLink Service to connect; after creating the Endpoint, you must provide the Endpoint ID to the service provider
Security Group Select Click the Select button to choose the Security Group to connect - Select up to 5
- If no Security Group is selected, all connections are blocked
description Select Enter description for PrivateLink Endpoint Table. PrivateLink Endpoint service information input fields - Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information Input area.
Category RequiredDetailed description tag Selection Add Tag - Up to 50 per resource can be added
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key and Value values
Table. PrivateLink Endpoint additional information input fields
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
- Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
- Once creation is complete, check the created resource on the PrivateLink Endpoint List page.
- To request a connection to a service provider via PrivateLink, you must go through an approval process.
- When applying for a service connection, you must verify the PrivateLink Service ID of the target in advance.
- Before applying for the service, an agreement on usage with the service provider must be completed.
- After the user creates a PrivateLink Endpoint, they must provide the Endpoint ID to the service provider. The service provider can verify the user’s Endpoint ID and promptly approve its use.
Check PrivateLink Endpoint details
PrivateLink Endpoint service allows you to view and edit the full list of resources and detailed information. PrivateLink Endpoint Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed information about the PrivateLink Endpoint, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPC menu. Navigate to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- Click the PrivateLink Endpoint menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the PrivateLink Endpoint List page.
- On the PrivateLink Endpoint List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the PrivateLink Endpoint Details page.
- PrivateLink Endpoint Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connection Management, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Category Detailed description status PrivateLink Endpoint status - Requesting: connection request/awaiting approval, Cancel request button displayed
- Active: creation completed, operating
- Creating: in progress
- Deleting: in progress
- Disconnected: connection blocked
- Rejected: connection denied, Request approval again button displayed
- Error: error occurred
- Canceled: connection request canceled, Request approval again button displayed
Delete PrivateLink Endpoint Button to delete PrivateLink Endpoint resource Table. PrivateLink Endpoint status information and additional features
- PrivateLink Endpoint Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connection Management, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Detailed Information
On the PrivateLink Endpoint List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource Name | PrivateLink Endpoint resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| constructor | User who created the PrivateLink Endpoint |
| Creation date and time | PrivateLink Endpoint creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who modified the PrivateLink Endpoint information |
| Modification date and time | Date and time the PrivateLink Endpoint information was modified |
| PrivateLink Endpoint name | PrivateLink Endpoint resource name |
| PrivateLink Endpoint ID | PrivateLink Endpoint ID information |
| PrivateLink Service ID | Connected PrivateLink Service ID information |
| PrivateLink Endpoint IP | PrivateLink Endpoint IP address |
| VPC name | Information about the connected VPC |
| Subnet name | Connected Subnet information |
| Port name | Port information of the PrivateLink Endpoint
|
| Security Group | Configured Security Group information
|
| Explanation | Description of PrivateLink Endpoint
|
tag
PrivateLink Endpoint List page allows you to view, add, modify, or delete the tag information of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
On the PrivateLink Endpoint List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Terminate PrivateLink Endpoint
You can terminate unused PrivateLink Endpoints to reduce operating costs.
To terminate a PrivateLink Endpoint, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > VPC Click the menu. Go to the VPC’s Service Home page.
- Click the PrivateLink Endpoint menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the PrivateLink Endpoint List page.
- On the PrivateLink Endpoint List page, click the resource you want to delete. Go to the PrivateLink Endpoint Details page.
- On the PrivateLink Endpoint Details page, click the PrivateLink Endpoint Delete button.
- After termination is complete, check whether the resource has been deleted from the PrivateLink Endpoint list.
Pre-service
This service must be installed in advance before creating it. Please refer to the provided user guide and prepare accordingly.
| Service Category | Service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Networking | VPC | It is a service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment. |
1.2.12 - NAT Logging
To store NAT logs, first create a bucket in Object Storage for the logs and configure that bucket in the NAT Logging repository. Then, when you enable log storage in the NAT detail view, NAT logs will begin to be saved to the Object Storage bucket.
To store NAT logs, you need to configure the following steps in order.
- To store NAT logs, you can create a bucket in Object Storage or use an existing bucket. To create a bucket, refer to Object Storage 생성하기.
- To set the bucket for NAT Logging’s log repository, refer to NAT Logging 로그 저장소 사용하기.
- To set the log storage option to Enabled in the NAT detailed view, refer to Using NAT Log Storage.
Using NAT Logging Log Repository
To set NAT log storage to enabled, you must first configure the log repository in NAT Logging.
- Click the All Services > Management > Network Logging > NAT Logging menu. You will be taken to the NAT Logging List page.
- NAT Logging List page, click the top Log Storage Settings button. You will be taken to the Log Storage Settings popup.
- Log storage settings In the popup window, select the log storage bucket. When you select a bucket, the log storage path is displayed.
- Log storage settings In the popup window, after checking Log storage bucket and Log storage path, click the Confirm button.
- Notification After reviewing the message in the popup window, click the Confirm button.
NAT Logging list
If you configure the NAT Logging log storage bucket, the NAT Logging list will be displayed.
- Click the All Services > Management > Network Logging > NAT Logging menu. You will be taken to the NAT Logging List page.
Category requiredDetailed description Resource ID Required NAT resource ID Save target Required NAT resource name Save registration date and time Required NAT log repository registration timestamp Table. NAT Logging list items
Check NAT Logging content
Refer to the information below to check the saved Log.
Stored log example: 2024-10-11T11:19:03,accept,259,17,192.168.2.173,46937,192.168.0.53,53,100.100.14.52,26937
| Category | Explanation |
|---|---|
| 2024-10-11T11:19:03 | Log date and time (2024-10-11, 11:19:03) |
| accept | Action (deny / accept) |
| 259 | Firewall Rule ID (Policy ID) that generated the log |
| 17 | IP Protocol ID
|
| 192.168.2.173 | Source IP |
| 46937 | Departure Port |
| 192.168.0.53 | Destination IP |
| 53 | Destination Port |
| 100.100.14.52 | NAT-translated IP |
| 26937 | NAT-translated Port |
NAT Logging Do not use log storage
In NAT Logging, you can set the log repository to be unused.
- All Services > Management > Network Logging > NAT Logging Click the menu. You will be taken to the NAT Logging List page.
- On the NAT Logging List page, click the top Log Storage Settings button. It will open the Log Storage Settings popup.
- In the Log storage settings popup, select Log storage bucket as Not used, and click the Confirm button.
1.3 - API Reference
1.4 - CLI Reference
1.5 - Release Note
VPC
- Provide VPC IP range addition feature
- You can add a new IP range to the VPC for use.
- Provides Virtual IP functionality
- You can reserve a Virtual IP in a Subnet for use.
- Private NAT feature improvement
- You can also use Private NAT with Transit Gateway.
- You can connect internal Samsung Cloud Platform data to the SCP service via a private path between the VPC and the SCP service without exposing it to the internet.
- Add Transit Gateway feature
- Easily connect the customer’s network with the Samsung Cloud Platform network and serve as a connection hub for multiple VPCs within the cloud environment.
- Add VPC Peering feature
- You can perform IP communication over a 1:1 private route between VPCs.
- Add Private NAT feature
- You can use Direct Connect from compute resources within the VPC to map the customer’s IP and establish a connection.
- Add VPC functionality
- Provides an Endpoint (entry point) that allows access to the Samsung Cloud Platform via a private connection from external networks connected to the VPC.
- Samsung Cloud Platform Common Feature Changes
- Account, IAM, Service Home, tags, and other common CX changes have been reflected.
- A feature to save NAT logs has been added.
- You can determine whether to retain NAT logs and store them in Object Storage.
- The VPC service that provides an isolated virtual network space has been launched.
- The VPC service that provides an isolated virtual network space has been launched.
2 - Security Group
2.1 - Overview
Service Overview
A Security Group is a virtual logical firewall that controls inbound/outbound traffic generated on virtual servers in Samsung Cloud Platform. The resources that can have a Security Group applied include Virtual Server, Database, Kubernetes Engine, etc. A Security Group is applied to the ports of the target resource, and multiple Security Groups can be applied depending on each resource’s characteristics.
When you first create a Security Group, it blocks all inbound and outbound traffic according to the default rule (Any/Deny).
Users can specify an IP address, port, and protocol to create inbound/outbound rules, and only traffic allowed by the created rules can access the target resources.
Component
The components that make up a Security Group are as follows.
| Component | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Applicable target | Resources to which the Security Group is applied
|
| Security Group Rules | When a Security Group is first created, it blocks all inbound and outbound traffic according to the default rule (Any/Deny)
|
Constraints
The Security Groups of Samsung Cloud Platform have default quotas (limits) set. There is a maximum number of Security Groups that can be created and a maximum number of Security Group rules. The Samsung Cloud Platform Console is a place where you can view and manage quotas for Samsung Cloud Platform services and request quota increases for many resources.
| Category | Default quota | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Security Group | 100 items | Number of default Security Groups that can be created per account |
| Number of Security Group rules | 100 items | Maximum number of default rules that can be created per Security Group |
| Security Group rule count > project | 1,000 items | Maximum number of default Security Group rules that can be created per account |
Preceding Service
Security Group has no preceding service.
2.2 - How-to guides
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Security Group service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create Security Group
You can create and use the Security Group service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create a Security Group, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
- Click the Create Security Group button on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Create Security Group page.
- Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description Security Group name Required Security Group name to create - English letters, numbers, and special characters (
-) can be used, and up to 255 characters can be entered
- Duplicate Security Group names are allowed within the project
Whether to save logs Select Select whether to store Security Group logs - Enabled: Store logs
- Disabled: Do not store logs
- Click Security Group Logging List Shortcut to go to the Security Group Logging list page
Table. Security Group service information input items - English letters, numbers, and special characters (
- Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
To store Security Group logs, first create a bucket in Object Storage for the logs, and configure that bucket as the log repository in Security Group Logging.
- The log storage settings can be verified in Security Group Logging, and for more details, refer to Security Group Logging.
- If you configure a log repository, Object Storage charges for log storage will be applied.
* In the **Additional Information Input** area, enter or select the required information.
Category
Required
Detailed description
tag
Select
Add Tag- Up to 50 can be added per resource
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key and Value values
Explanation
Select
User additional description- Up to 255 characters allowed
Table. Security Group additional information input fields
- Check the input information and click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, check the created resources on the Security Group List page.
Check Security Group detailed information
On the Security Group menu’s Security Group List page, you can view and edit the full resource list and detailed information.
To view detailed information about a Security Group, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
- On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. You will be taken to the Security Group list page.
- On the Security Group List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Security Group Details page.
- Security Group Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Rules, Tags, Activity History tabs.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service status | Security Group status
|
| Service termination | Cancel service button |
Detailed Information
Security Group List lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information when needed.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource Name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Constructor | User who created the service |
| Creation Date/Time | Service creation date and time |
| Editor | User who edited the service information |
| Modification date | Date and time the service information was modified |
| Security Group name | Resource Name |
| Security Group ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Number of Security Group rules | The rule quota and the number of rules currently in use for this Security Group |
| Security Group rule count/Account | Security Group rule quota for the account and the total number of rules in use across all Security Groups in the account |
| description | Additional description written by the user
|
| Whether to save logs | Security Group log storage option
|
| Applicable Service | The service type, service name, and status of the service to which this Security Group is applied |
Rule
Security Group list page lets you view the rule list of the selected resource and add or delete rules.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Excel download | Bulk rule entry Excel file download button |
| More | Additional Function Button
|
| Advanced Search | Rule Detail Search Button |
| Add rule | Add Rule button |
| direction | Traffic direction for servers with Security Group applied
|
| Rule ID | Unique ID value for the rule |
| Target address | Target address for communicating with a server that has a Security Group applied |
| Remote Security Group name | The Security Group resource name displayed when the target is set to a Security Group |
| Remote Security Group ID | Security Group ID displayed when the target is set to a Security Group |
| Service | Protocol and Port |
| Explanation | Additional description written by the user |
| Delete | Delete rule |
tag
Security Group List page lets you view, add, modify, or delete tag information for the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the Security Group List page.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Managing Security Group Resources
You can manage resources such as log storage settings and rule additions for a Security Group.
Using Log Storage
To store Security Group logs, first create a bucket in Object Storage for the logs, and then configure that bucket in the log repository of Security Group Logging.
- The log storage settings can be verified in Security Group Logging, and for more details, refer to Security Group Logging.
- If you configure a log repository, Object Storage charges will be applied for log storage.
To save Security Group logs, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
- On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. You will be taken to the Security Group list page.
- On the Security Group List page, click the resource (Security Group name) for which you want to store logs. You will be taken to the Security Group Details page.
- Click the Edit icon of Log Save Status. You will be taken to the Log Save Status Edit popup window.
- Modify Log Saving Option In the popup window, select Use for the log repository, and click the Confirm button.
Disable log storage
To stop storing Security Group logs, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
- On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. You will be taken to the Security Group list page.
- On the Security Group List page, click the resource (Security Group name) that you do not want to log. You will be taken to the Security Group Details page.
- Click the Edit icon of Log Save Option. It navigates to the Log Save Option Edit popup.
- Modify Log Saving Option In the popup window, deselect Use for the log repository, and click the Confirm button.
- Notification Check the message in the popup window and click the OK button.
Add rule
To add a Security Group rule, follow the steps below.
Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. You will be taken to the Security Group list page.
Security Group List page, click the resource (Security Group name) to which you want to add a rule. Navigate to the Security Group Details page.
On the Security Group Details page, click the Rules tab. You will be taken to the Rules tab page.
on the Rules tab, click the Add Rule button. You will be taken to the Add Rule popup.
Category RequiredDetailed description Target input method Required Configure rule remote type - CIDR: Set target address by directly entering IP
- Security Group: Set to target the created Security Group
Remote > Target address Required If CIDR is selected, you must enter the target IP address - Enter in CIDR (IP address/subnet mask) format
- using
,and-, you can input multiple addresses at once, up to 100.
- Enter ‘0.0.0.0/0’ to use the entire IP range (ANY).
- using
Remote > Security Group Required When Security Group is selected, a Security Group selection is required. type Required Select protocol type to apply the rule - Select destination port/Type: Select protocol type
- Internet Protocol: Enter protocol numbers, up to 100 can be entered
- All: Select the entire range for destination port/Type and protocol, meaning all ports for all protocols
Type > Protocol Required Select detailed protocol for the type - Select the desired protocol among TCP, UDP, and ICMP; input fields vary depending on the selected protocol
- When ICMP is selected in the protocol, you can set the ICMP Type
- Select a commonly used Type, such as Echo, from the values defined for ICMP Type
- Click the Add button to add an input value
- When TCP/UDP is selected in the protocol, you can choose allowed ports such as SSH, HTTP, etc.
- When entering manually, you can input values from 1 to 65,535, and you can enter up to 100 entries at once using commas (,) or ranges (-)
- Click the Add button to add an input value
- When Internet Protocol is selected in the type
1 ~ 254Enter a protocol number within 1 to 254
direction Required Target application criteria, traffic direction configuration - Inbound rule: External → Server
- Outbound rule: Server → External
Explanation Select Additional description provided by the user Table. Detailed items for adding Security Group rulesAfter reviewing the rules to be added, click the Confirm button.
Batch Create Rules
To add multiple Security Group rules at once, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
- From the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. You will be taken to the Security Group list page.
- Security Group List page, click the resource (Security Group name) to which you want to add a rule. Security Group Details page will be displayed.
- On the Security Group Details page, click the Rules tab. You will be taken to the Rules tab page.
- Click the Excel Download button on the Rules tab. The bulk rule entry Excel file will be downloaded.
- Enter the rule information into the batch rule entry Excel file, then save it.
- More > Bulk Rule Input Click the button. Bulk Rule Input popup window opens.
- Batch Rule Input In the popup window, click Attach File, attach the Excel file you prepared, and click Upload File.
- You cannot upload the attached Excel file if its format differs from the registration form or if the file is encrypted.
- You can upload up to 100 batch registration rules at a time. If you exceed the maximum number of registration rules, the upload will not be allowed.
- If you exceed the maximum number of rules that can be registered in the Account, you cannot upload the file.
- Rule Confirmation Check the details in the popup window and click the Confirm button.
Delete rule
To delete a Security Group rule, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
- On the Service Home page, click the Security Group menu. You will be taken to the Security Group list page.
- Security Group List page, click the resource (Security Group name) for which you want to add a rule. Security Group Details page will be displayed.
- On the Security Group Details page, click the Rules tab. You will be taken to the Rules tab page.
- In the Rules tab, click the Delete button for the rule you want to delete.
Terminate Security Group
You can delete unused Security Groups.
To delete a Security Group, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Security Group menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
- Click the Security Group menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Security Group List page.
- On the Security Group List page, select the resource (Security Group name) to terminate, and click the Terminate Service button.
- After termination is complete, check on the Security Group list page whether the resource has been deleted.
2.2.1 - Security Group Logging
To store Security Group logs, first create a bucket in Object Storage for log storage and configure that bucket in the Security Group Logging repository. Then, on the Security Group Details page, set up log storage, and the Security Group logs will be saved to the Object Storage bucket.
To save Security Group logs, follow these steps.
- To store Security Group logs, you can create a bucket in Object Storage or use an existing bucket. To create a bucket, refer to Object Storage 생성하기.
- To configure the bucket for the log repository of Security Group Logging, refer to Security Group Logging Log Repository Setup.
- In the Security Group detail view, to set log storage to Enabled, please refer to Security Group Enable Log Storage.
Security Group Logging Configure log storage usage
To set the log storage option of a Security Group to Enabled, you must first configure a log repository in Security Group Logging.
To enable the log repository for Security Group Logging, follow these steps.
- All Services > Management > Network Logging > Security Group Logging Click the menu. You will be taken to the Security Group Logging List page.
- On the Security Group Logging List page, click the Log Storage Settings button at the top. You will be taken to the Log Storage Settings popup.
- Log storage settings In the popup window, select the log storage bucket. When you select a bucket, the log storage path is displayed.
- Log storage settings In the popup window, after checking Log storage bucket and Log storage path, click the Confirm button.
- Notification After reviewing the message in the popup window, click the Confirm button.
Query Security Group Logging List
If you configure the log storage bucket for Security Group Logging, you can view the Security Group Logging list.
To view the Security Group Logging list, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Management > Network Logging > Security Group Logging menu. Navigate to the Security Group Logging List page.
- Security Group Logging List page, verify the resources in use and the log storage targets.
Category Detailed description Resource ID Security Group ID Save target Security Group name Save registration date and time Security Group log storage registration timestamp Table. Security Group Logging list itemsReferenceAfter configuring the log repository for Security Group Logging, you must set the log storage option to Enabled in the Security Group detail view for logging to begin. For more details, see Security Group Log Storage Usage.
Security Group Logging Check detailed information
The stored logs have different detailed information depending on the protocol. Refer to the information below to view the details.
TCP / UDP
Example of stored log: 2024-10-11T02:18:39,drop,to-lport: tcp,198.19.65.2,6443,192.168.22.131,20427
| Category | Explanation |
|---|---|
| 2024-10-11T02:18:39 | Log date and time (2024-10-11, 02:18:39) |
| drop | Action (drop / allow) |
| to-lport | Direction
|
| tcp | Protocol (tcp / udp / icmp / ip) |
| 192.168.65.2 | Source IP |
| 6443 | Departure Port |
| 192.168.22.131 | Destination IP |
| 20427 | Destination Port |
ICMP
Saved log example: 2024-10-11T02:18:39,allow,to-lport: icmp,192.168.65.2,192.168.22.131,8
| Category | description |
|---|---|
| 2024-10-11T02:18:39 | Log date and time (2024-10-11, 02:18:39) |
| to-lport | Direction
|
| allow | Action (drop / allow) |
| tcp | Protocol (tcp / udp / icmp / ip) |
| 192.168.65.2 | Source IP |
| 192.168.22.131 | Destination IP |
| 8 | ICMP type ID |
IP
Stored log example: 2024-10-11T02:18:39,deny,ip,192.168.65.2,192.168.22.131,103
| Category | Explanation |
|---|---|
| 2024-10-11T02:18:39 | Log date and time (2024-10-11, 02:18:39) |
| deny | Action (drop / allow) |
| ip | Protocol |
| 192.168.65.2 | Source IP |
| 192.168.22.131 | Destination IP |
| 103 | IP Protocol ID
|
Security Group Logging Disable Log Storage Configuration
In Security Group Logging, you can set the log storage to unused.
To disable the log repository for Security Group Logging, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Management > Network Logging > Security Group Logging menu. You will be taken to the Security Group Logging List page.
- Security Group Logging List page, click the top Log Storage Settings icon. You will be taken to the Log Storage Settings popup window.
- Log storage configuration in the popup window, select log storage bucket as Not used, and click the Confirm button.
- Log storage settings can be changed when no log storage target is configured.
- To change the log storage bucket, first set it to disabled. Then you can modify it by re-enabling it.
2.2.2 - Migration Rules
Users can retrieve rules created in the V1 environment of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and apply them to the V2 service.
Getting Security Group Rules
You can import rules created in the V1 environment of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and migrate them to the V2 service for use.
- When a Security Group rule is migrated to the V2 environment using the Migration feature, the Migration label appears before its name.
- If a Security Group rule description exceeds 255 characters, part of the description will be omitted.
- Each Security Group can have up to 200 rules, and any rule that exceeds the maximum allowable quantity will not be registered.
To retrieve the Security Group rules of V1, follow these steps.
All Services > Networking > Security Group menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
On the Service Home page, click the Migration Rules menu. 2. Go to the Migration Rules page.
Select the rule information to retrieve from the Migration Rules page and click Done.
Category Detailed description Original rule environment SCP v1 (Vmware) Auto-select Applicable target Select the Security Group list in the account to apply the transferred rule Get rules Click the Attach File button to upload the decrypted Security Group rule file - After decrypting and saving the rule file extracted from the original environment, upload it
Rule List View uploaded Security Group rule file details - Delete: Delete selected rule
- Edit: Modify selected rule information, see [Edit transferred Security Group rule](#이관할-Security Group-규칙-수정하기) for details
Table. Migration Rules detailed itemsAfter the Security Group rule transfer request is completed, verify that the transfer item has been added to the Security Group list.
Modify the Security Group rules to be transferred
You can edit each item when retrieving rules created in the V1 environment of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To modify the Security Group rules to be imported from V1, follow these steps.
All Services > Networking > Security Group Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Security Group.
On the Service Home page, click the Migration Rules menu. 2. Go to the Migration Rules page.
In the rule import section, click Attach File to upload the Security Group rule file.
In the rule list, click Edit for the rule item you want to modify.
Category Required or notDetailed description Target Input Method Required Remote rule type setting - CIDR: Set the target address by entering the IP directly
- Security Group: Set to the created Security Group
Remote > Target address Essential If CIDR is selected, you need to enter the target IP address - Enter in CIDR (IP address/subnet mask) format
, usingand-you can input multiple addresses up to 100 at once.
- To use the entire IP range (ANY), enter ‘0.0.0.0/0’
Remote > Security Group Essential When Security Group is selected, a Security Group must be chosen. type Required Select protocol type to which the rule will be applied - Select destination port/Type: Select protocol type
- Internet Protocol: Enter protocol numbers, up to 100 entries allowed
- All: Select destination port/Type and protocol for the entire range, meaning all ports for all protocols
Type > Protocol Required Select detailed protocol for the type - Select the desired protocol among TCP, UDP, and ICMP; input fields vary depending on the selected protocol
- When ICMP is selected in the protocol, you can set the ICMP Type
- Select a commonly used Type, such as Echo, from the values defined for ICMP Type
- Click the Add button to add an input value
- When TCP/UDP is selected in the protocol, you can choose allowed ports such as SSH, HTTP, etc.
- When entering manually, you can input values from 1 to 65,535, and you can enter up to 100 entries at once using commas (,) or ranges (-)
- Click the Add button to add an input value
- When Internet Protocol is selected in the type
1 ~ 254Enter a protocol number within the range
direction Essential Set the traffic direction for the applicable target - Inbound rule: external → server
- Outbound rule: server → external
Explanation Selection Additional description written by the user Table. Detailed items of the Security Group rule edit windowWhen the rule information edit is complete, click Confirm in the edit window.
Review the edited rule information and click Done.
2.3 - API Reference
2.4 - CLI Reference
2.5 - Release Note
Security Group
- For user convenience, a Migration Rules page has been added that allows you to import Security Group rules created in the V1 environment and apply them to the V2 service.
- When adding a Security Group rule, multiple service ports can be selected
- Improved the console to allow selecting multiple service ports when adding a rule.
- Add Security Group rule input method
- A feature allowing IP protocol input has been added.
- A feature to select Well-known protocols has been added.
- Samsung Cloud Platform Common Feature Changes
- Account, IAM, Service Home, tags, and other common CX changes have been reflected.
- Improved to allow entering multiple IPs when adding Security Group rules.
- A feature to store Security Group logs has been added.
- You can decide whether to store Security Group logs and store the logs in Object Storage.
- The Security Group service, which provides virtual firewall functionality for instance resources, has been launched.
- You can control inbound and outbound traffic generated from instance resources through the Security Group service.
- The Security Group service, which provides virtual firewall functionality for instance resources, has been launched.
- You can control inbound and outbound traffic generated from instance resources through the Security Group service.
3 - Load Balancer
3.1 - Overview
Service Overview
The Load Balancer (LB) service of Samsung Cloud Platform automatically distributes traffic to available servers when there is an unpredictable traffic surge or server failure, ensuring the stability and continuity of customer services.
A Load Balancer serves as the service endpoint provided to clients, is deployed in a VPC subnet according to the service type (L4 / L7), and you can configure multiple services by adding listeners to the created Load Balancer.
The Listener receives client requests through the service port and processes traffic according to routing rules. L4 supports TCP / UDP / TLS protocols, and L7 supports HTTP / HTTPS protocols; in L7, you can specify an LB server group for each routing condition or set a redirect response for the request URL.
The LB server group forwards requests received by the Listener to specific servers based on load balancing and health checks. The servers receive client requests from the Load Balancer’s Source NAT IP through the ports configured for the members, and the server status is periodically monitored by the Load Balancer’s health check IP.
LB health check defines the member health check method registered in the LB server group. You can select a default LB health check resource provided for the LB server group, or create a new one to configure monitoring suitable for the application.
Features
- Various load balancing methods: Round Robin, Least Connection, IP Hash, etc., are provided.
- SSL Authentication Encryption and Offloading: Supports SSL offloading and allows selection of encryption level.
- Enhanced Security: Use a firewall to manage Load Balancer communication and view connection logs by storing logs.
Service Architecture Diagram
Provided features
- Load Balancer: Select the service type and configure the IP to be used by the Load Balancer.
- Listener: Set the protocol, port, and routing rules. You can add multiple Listeners to a single Load Balancer.
- LB server group: Sets the load balancing method. LB server group can be attached to a single Load Balancer.
- Member: Select the server to add to the LB server group. You can choose Virtual Server or Bare Metal Server resources created in the same VPC as the Load Balancer, or enter an IP address directly.
- LB health check: Sets the member health check method. LB health checks can be registered and used across multiple LB server groups.
Component
A Load Balancer consists of a Load Balancer (Listener), LB server group (member), and LB health check.
Load Balancer
The components that make up a Load Balancer are as follows. By configuring each component, you can set up load balancing suitable for the customer’s workload.
| Component | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service Category | Load Balancer service type
|
| Service Sunbet | Assign the Service IP, Source NAT IP, and Health Check IP required for the Load Balancer in the Subnet range of the VPC Subnet
|
| Service IP | Service IP that the client accesses |
| Source NAT IP | IP used to forward server traffic in the Load Balancer |
| Health check IP | IP used for health checks in the Load Balancer |
| Listener | Resources connected to the Load Balancer
|
LB server group
The elements that make up an LB server group are as follows. Traffic is delivered to members of the LB server group according to the settings of each component.
| Component | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Protocol | LB server group forwarding protocol |
| Load balancing | Traffic distribution method
|
| LB health check | Member health check method
|
| Member | Server that processes client requests
|
LB health check
The elements that make up the LB health check are as follows. Member health checks are performed according to the settings of each component.
| Component | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Protocol | Health check protocol |
| Health check port | Port used for health check |
| Period | Health check execution interval |
| Waiting time | Server response latency for health check |
| Detection count | Criteria for determining member health check status (Healthy / Unhealthy) |
Constraints
The Load Balancer of Samsung Cloud Platform has a default quota, which limits the number of Load Balancers, Listeners, LB server groups, and members that can be created. You can manage current usage through the Console and request additional quota for items that can be expanded.
| Item | Default quota | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| LOAD_BALANCER.SERVICE_SUBNET.DEFAULT.COUNT | 3 | Number of Service Subnets per VPC that can create a Load Balancer |
| LOAD_BALANCER.DEFAULT.COUNT | 50 | Number of Load Balancers created per Region |
| LOAD_BALANCER.LISTENER.DEFAULT.COUNT | 1000 | Number of Listeners created per Region |
| LOAD_BALANCER.SERVER_GROUP.DEFAULT.COUNT | 1000 | Number of LB server groups created per region |
| LOAD_BALANCER.MEMBER.DEFAULT.COUNT | 1000 | Number of members that can be registered to the entire LB server group per region |
| LOAD_BALANCER.HEALTH_CHECK.DEFAULT.COUNT | 500 | Number of LB health checks created per region |
Preliminary Service
This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating a Load Balancer service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.
| Service Category | Service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Networking | VPC | A service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment |
3.1.1 - ServiceWatch metric
The Load Balancer sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by basic monitoring are data collected at 5‑minute intervals.
Basic Metrics
The following are the default metrics for the Load Balancer namespace.
The indicators whose names are displayed in bold text below are the key metrics selected from the basic metrics provided by Load Balancer. Key metrics are used to build the service dashboards that are automatically created for each service in ServiceWatch.
Each metric provides guidance in the user guide on which statistical values are meaningful when querying that metric, and among the meaningful statistics, the values shown in bold are the primary statistics. In the service dashboard, you can view key metrics using primary statistical values.
| Performance items | Detailed description | unit | meaningful statistics |
|---|---|---|---|
| LB Status | Load Balancer status | - | - |
| LB Total Connections | LB cumulative connection count | Count |
|
| LB Total L4 Connections | Cumulative L4 connection count | Count |
|
| LB Total L7 Connections | Cumulative L7 connection count | Count |
|
| LB Total SSL Connections | Cumulative SSL connection count | Count |
|
| LB Total TCP Connections | Cumulative TCP connection count | Count |
|
| LB Current Connections | Current number of active connections | Count |
|
| LB Current SSL Connections | Current SSL connection count | Count |
|
| LB Peak Connections | LB maximum connections | Count |
|
| LB Total Requests | LB cumulative request count | Count |
|
| LB Current Requests | LB current request count | Count |
|
| LB Connection Rate (CPS) | Number of new inbound connections | Count |
|
| LB Forward Bytes | Cumulative bytes transferred from the LB to the server | Bytes |
|
| LB Forward Bytes (Delta) | Cumulative bytes (Delta) delivered from LB to server | Bytes |
|
| LB Forward Packets | Cumulative packets delivered from the LB to the server | Count |
|
| LB Forward Packets (Delta) | Cumulative packets (Delta) delivered from the LB to the server | Count |
|
| LB Reverse Bytes | Cumulative packets delivered from LB to the server | Bytes |
|
| LB Reverse Bytes (Delta) | Cumulative bytes (Delta) received from the server | Bytes |
|
| LB Reverse Packets | Cumulative packets received from the server | Count |
|
| LB Reverse Packets (Delta) | Cumulative packets (Delta) received from the server | Count |
|
| LB Current Responses | LB current response count | Count |
|
| LB Total Success Responses | Cumulative successful response count | Count |
|
| LB Last Response Time | LB last response time | Milliseconds |
|
| LB Fastest Response Time | LB shortest response time | Milliseconds |
|
| LB Slowest Response Time | LB maximum response time | Milliseconds |
|
| LB Total Failure Actions | Number of failures handled in LB | Count |
|
| Listener Status | Listener status | Count |
|
| Listener Total Connections | Listener cumulative connection count | Count |
|
| Listener Total L4 Connections | Cumulative L4 connection count | Count |
|
| Listener Total L7 Connections | Cumulative L7 connection count | Count |
|
| Listener Total SSL Connections | Cumulative SSL connection count | Count |
|
| Listener Total TCP Connections | Cumulative TCP connection count | Count |
|
| Listener Current Connections | Current number of active connections | Count |
|
| Listener Current SSL Connections | Current SSL connection count | Count |
|
| Listener Peak Connections | Maximum number of connections for the listener | Count |
|
| Listener Current Requests | Listener current request count | Count |
|
| Listener Total Requests | Listener cumulative request count | Count |
|
| Listener Connection Rate (CPS) | Number of new inbound connections | Count |
|
| Listener Forward Bytes | Cumulative bytes transferred from the Listener to the server | Bytes |
|
| Listener Forward Bytes (Delta) | Cumulative bytes (Delta) transmitted from the Listener to the server | Bytes |
|
| Listener Forward Packets | Cumulative packets transmitted from the Listener to the server | Count |
|
| Listener Forward Packets (Delta) | Cumulative packets (Delta) transmitted from the Listener to the server | Count |
|
| Listener Reverse Bytes | Cumulative bytes received from the server | Bytes |
|
| Listener Reverse Bytes (Delta) | Cumulative bytes (Delta) received from the server | Bytes |
|
| Listener Reverse Packets | Cumulative packets received from the server | Count |
|
| Listener Reverse Packets (Delta) | Cumulative packets (Delta) received from the server | Count |
|
| Listener Current Responses | Listener current response count | Count |
|
| Listener Total Success Responses | Cumulative successful response count | Count |
|
| Listener Last Response Time | Listener last response time | Milliseconds |
|
| Listener Fastest Response Time | Listener minimum response time | Milliseconds |
|
| Listener Slowest Response Time | Listener maximum response time | Milliseconds |
|
| Listener Total Failure Actions | Number of failures processed in the Listener | Count |
|
| ServerGroup Status | LB server group status | Count |
|
| ServerGroup Request Count | Cumulative request count for LB server group | Count |
|
| ServerGroup Response Count | LB server group cumulative response count | Count |
|
| ServerGroup 2xx Response Count | Number of HTTP 2xx responses | Count |
|
| ServerGroup 3xx Response Count | Number of HTTP 3xx responses | Count |
|
| ServerGroup 4xx Response Count | Number of HTTP 4xx responses | Count |
|
| ServerGroup 5xx Response Count | Number of HTTP 5xx responses | Count |
|
| ServerGroup Healthy Member Count | Number of healthy members | Count |
|
| ServerGroup Unhealthy Member Count | Health check abnormal member count | Count |
|
| ServerGroup Peak Connections | Maximum connections for LB server group | Count |
|
3.2 - How-to guides
Users can create a service by entering the required Load Balancer information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create Load Balancer
You can create and use a Load Balancer service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create a Load Balancer, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Create Load Balancer button. You will be taken to the Create Load Balancer page.
- On the Load Balancer Creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
| Category | Required status | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Load Balancer name | Required | Load Balancer resource name
|
| Service Category | Required | Load Balancer service type
|
| VPC name | Required | VPC where the Load Balancer will be created
|
| Service Subnet name | Required | VPC Subnet where the Load Balancer will be created
|
| Service IP | Select | Load Balancer’s service IP
|
| Public NAT IP | Select | Select the Public NAT IP to use in the Load Balancer when allowing service access from external (Internet) sources
|
| Source NAT IP | Selection | IP used for member communication in the Load Balancer
|
| Health check IP | Selection | IP to be used for health checks in the Load Balancer
|
| Use firewall | Select | Set whether to use the firewall
|
| Firewall log storage | Select | Select whether to store Firewall logs
|
- In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category Required statusDetailed description description Select Enter resource description tag Select Add tags - Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
Table. Load Balancer additional information input fields
- Check the created service information and the estimated billing amount, then click the Create button.
- After creation is complete, check the created resources on the Load Balancer List page.guide
- Load Balancer service does not provide access control for Service IP and service ports.
- When creating a Load Balancer, select Use Firewall to manage communication between the client and the Load Balancer, and between the Load Balancer and members with Firewall rules, and we recommend using Save Firewall Logs to store access logs.
- When creating a service and enabling the Firewall log storage feature, you must configure the log storage first. If the log storage is not configured, you cannot create a Load Balancer service.
CautionWhen using a firewall, you must add rules required for Load Balancer communication. Register the rules, paying attention to the direction for each purpose.
- If you do not add a rule, the Load Balancer service will not operate correctly.
Purpose Source IP Destination IP Protocol Destination Port/Type direction Client → LB connection Client IP LB Service IP Listener protocol Listener service port Outbound LB → Member connection LB Source NAT IP LB server group member IP LB server group protocol Member port Inbound LB → Member health check LB health check IP LB server group member IP Health check protocol Health check port - When the health check port and member port differ, register the member port
Inbound Figures and tables. Add Load Balancer firewall rule - Load Balancer service does not provide access control for Service IP and service ports.
- After creation is complete, check the created resources on the Load Balancer List page.
Check Load Balancer detailed information
The Load Balancer service can be viewed and edited for the resource list and detailed information in the Load Balancer menu. The Load Balancer Details page consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Follow these steps to view detailed information about the Load Balancer service.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
- From the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer list page.
- Load Balancer List page, click the resource to view its details. You will be taken to the Load Balancer Details page.
- Load Balancer Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description status Load Balancer resource status - Active: Service is operating normally
- Deleting: Service termination request is being processed
- Creating: Service creation request is being processed
- Error: Unable to determine current status due to internal error
- Editing: Service modification request is being processed
Service termination Delete Load Balancer resource Table. Load Balancer status information and additional feature items
- Load Balancer Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
In the Detailed Information tab, you can view the detailed information of the resource selected from the Load Balancer list and edit the necessary information.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource Name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Creation date | Service creation date and time |
| Modification date and time | Service modification date and time |
| constructor | Service creation request user |
| Editor | User requesting service modification |
| Load Balancer name | Load Balancer name |
| Service IP | Load Balancer’s Service IP (used for communication between client and Load Balancer)
|
| Service Category | Load Balancer service type |
| Source NAT IP | Load Balancer’s Source NAT IP (used for communication between Load Balancer and servers)
|
| VPC name | VPC resource name where the Load Balancer is created
|
| Service Subnet name | Subnet resource name where the Load Balancer was created
|
| Public NAT IP | Load Balancer’s Public NAT IP (used when configuring internet service)
|
| Private NAT IP | Load Balancer’s Private NAT IP
|
| Health check IP | Load Balancer Health Check IP (used when performing health checks on LB server group members)
|
| Explanation | Additional information or description about Load Balancer
|
| Firewall name | Firewall resource name connected to Load Balancer
|
Connected resources
Connected Resources tab lets you view the list of Listeners attached to the Load Balancer, and you can create or delete Listeners.
- In the Connected Resources tab, selecting the Listener item takes you to the Listener Details page where you can view, edit, and delete the detailed information.
- On the Listener Details page, clicking the Edit icon lets you modify the information.
| Category | Detailed description | |
|---|---|---|
| Create Listener | Create Listener button | |
| Listener name | Listener resource name | |
| Routing rules | Routing rules attached to the Listener
| |
| Protocol | Protocol that the Listener receives | |
| Port | Port that the Listener receives | |
| Creation Date/Time | Listener creation time | |
| Delete | Delete Listener button |
tag
Load Balancer List page lets you view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
Work History tab allows you to view the work history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Work log | Task execution details |
| Work Date/Time | Task execution date and time |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| Resource name | Load Balancer name |
| Operation result | Task execution result (success/failure) |
| Operator Information | User information of the performed operation |
Load Balancer Resource Management
You can manage resources such as creating and deleting Load Balancer listeners.
Create Listener
Create a Listener on the Load Balancer to receive client requests and handle traffic according to the Listener configuration.
The protocol that receives client requests varies depending on the Load Balancer service type.
- L4 Load Balancer case: TLS, TCP, UDP protocols
- When using an L7 Load Balancer: HTTP, HTTPS protocols
Creating a Listener in L4 Load Balancer
To create a Listener in the L4 Load Balancer, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer list page.
- Load Balancer List page, click the Load Balancer resource to create a Listener. You will be taken to the Load Balancer Details page.
- On the Load Balancer Details page, click the Connected Resources tab. You will be taken to the Connected Resources tab page.
- On the Connected Resources tab page, click the Create Listener button in the upper right.
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
- The information that can be entered varies depending on the protocol.
| Category | Required | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Load Balancer | Required | Name of the Load Balancer resource where the Listener will be created |
| Listener name | Required | Listener resource name |
| Protocol | Required | Select Listener receive protocol
|
| service port | Required | Enter Listener receiving port
|
| Routing rules | Required | Routing rule configuration
|
| Session retention time | Required | Client session keep-alive time setting
|
| Proxy Protocol | Select | Set whether to add client IP information to the proxy protocol header (when using TCP protocol)
|
| Persistence | Required | Select Sticky Session method (set when using TCP, TLS protocols)
|
| SSL certificate | Select | Select default encryption certificate and security level (when using the TLS protocol)
|
| Server SSL security level | Required | Select security level when configuring End-to-End SSL (TLS protocol settings)
|
- In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
| Category | Required | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Explanation | Select | Enter resource description |
| tag | Select | Add tags
|
- Verify the created service information and click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Load Balancer Details page’s Connected Resources tab.
Creating a Listener in L7 Load Balancer
Follow these steps to create a Listener in an L7 Load Balancer.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. Go to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer list page.
- On the Load Balancer List page, click the Load Balancer resource for which you want to create a Listener. You will be taken to the Load Balancer Details page.
- Click the Connected Resources tab on the Load Balancer Details page. You will be taken to the Connected Resources tab page.
- On the Connected Resources tab page, click the Create Listener button in the upper right.
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
- The information that can be entered varies depending on the protocol.
| Category | Required status | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Load Balancer | Required | Load Balancer resource name where the Listener is created |
| Listener name | Required | Listener resource name |
| Protocol | Required | Select Listener reception protocol
|
| service port | Required | Listener receive port input
|
| Routing Rules > Routing Action | Required | Select routing processing method
|
| Routing Rules > Routing Conditions | Required | When the routing action is LB server group forwarding, set the LB server group per routing condition
|
| Persistence | Selection | Select Sticky Session mode (set when the routing action is LB server group forwarding)
|
| Listener timeout setting > Session keep-alive time | Select | HTTP connection keep-alive time setting
|
| Listener timeout setting > HTTP connection timeout | Select | Set HTTP response timeout
|
| X-Forwarded-For | Select | Set whether to insert client IP information
|
| X-Forwarded-Proto | Select | Set whether to insert client request protocol information
|
| X-Forwarded-Port | Select | Set whether to insert client request port information
|
| HTTP 2.0 | Select | Set whether to use HTTP/2 for client‑server connections |
| SSL certificate | Select | Select encryption certificate and security level (HTTPS protocol usage)
|
| Server SSL security level | Required | Select security level when configuring End-to-End SSL (HTTPSS protocol setting)
|
The routing rule’s URL path matching method is Starts with(prefix match).
- It checks whether the entered URL path starts with a specific string, and if the beginning matches, the routing rule is applied.
- Example: when the entered URL is
/api/- Matching URL:
/api/users, /api/v1/login, /api/images/logo.png - Unmatched URL:
/auth/api/, /API/users
- Matching URL:
- In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
| Category | Required status | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Explanation | Select | Enter resource description |
| tag | Select | Add tags
|
- Verify the created service information and click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Load Balancer Details page’s Connected Resources tab.
SSL security level support items
The list of TLS versions and Cipher Suites supported by the Listener for each SSL security level is as follows.
| Security level | TLS version | Cipher Suite (encryption algorithm) |
|---|---|---|
| High | TLS 1.3 | TLS13_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 TLS13_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 TLS13_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256 |
| Normal/Low | Normal: TLS 1.3, 1.2 Low: TLS 1.3, 1.2, 1.1 | TLS13_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 TLS13_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 TLS13_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256 RC4-MD5 RC4-SHA DES-CBC3-SHA DHE-RSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256 DHE-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384 DHE-RSA-CHACHA20-PLY1305 ECDHE-RSA-AES128-SHA ECDHE-RSA-AES256-SHA ECDHE-RSA-AES128-SHA256 ECDHE-RSA-AES256-SHA384 ECDHE-RSA-CHACHA20-POLY135 ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-SHA ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-SHA ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-SHA256 ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-SHA384 ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256 ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384 ECDHE-ECDSA-CHACHA20-POLY1305 |
Check Listener detailed information
On the Connected Resources tab of the Load Balancer Details page, you can select a Listener to view and edit its detailed information.
To view the Listener’s detailed information, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. Navigate to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer List page.
- On the Load Balancer List page, click the resource whose details you want to view. You will be taken to the Load Balancer Details page.
- On the Load Balancer Details page, click the Connected Resources tab.
- Click the Listener to view detailed information from the list of connected resources. It navigates to the Listener Details page.
- Listener Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| status | Listener status
|
| Delete Listener | Delete Listener |
Detailed Information
Detailed Information tab allows you to view the Listener’s detailed information and edit the necessary details. Detailed information varies depending on the Load Balancer in use.
L4 Load Balancer Detailed Information
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource Name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| constructor | User requesting listener creation |
| Creation Date/Time | Listener creation time |
| Editor | User requesting listener modification |
| Modification date | Listener modification timestamp |
| Listener name | Listener name |
| Protocol | Listener usage protocol |
| Port | Listener port |
| Session retention time | Client session retention time
|
| Proxy Protocol | Whether to insert client IP information
|
| Persistence | Use of sticky session
|
| Routing rules | Routing action and LB server group information
|
| SSL certificate | Default certificate and SSL security level, expiration date and time information
|
| SNI certificate | SNI Certificate Details
|
| Server SSL security level | Whether server connection is encrypted
|
| Explanation | Additional information about the Listener
|
L7 Load Balancer Detailed Information
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource Name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| constructor | User requesting listener creation |
| Creation Date/Time | Listener creation time |
| Editor | User requesting listener modification |
| Modification date | Listener modification timestamp |
| Listener name | Listener name |
| Protocol | Listener usage protocol |
| Port | Listener port |
| Session retention time | HTTP connection keep-alive time
|
| Client connection keep-alive time | HTTP client connection keep-alive timeout
|
| Server response latency | HTTP server response wait timeout
|
| X-Forwarded-For | Whether to insert client IP information
|
| X-Forwarded-Proto | Whether to insert client request protocol information
|
| X-Forwarded-Port | Whether to insert client request port information
|
| Persistence | Use of sticky session
|
| HTTP 2.0 | Whether to use HTTP/2 for client-server connections
|
| Routing rules | Routing action and routing condition/redirect target information
|
| SSL certificate | Default certificate and SSL security level, expiration date and time information
|
| SNI certificate | SNI Certificate Details
|
| Server SSL security level | Whether server connection is encrypted
|
| Explanation | Additional information about the Listener
|
tag
You can view, add, modify, or delete a Listener’s tag information.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
You can view the Listener’s operation history.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Work log | Task execution details |
| Operation Date/Time | Task execution date and time |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| Resource Name | Listener name |
| Operation result | Task execution result (success/failure) |
| Operator Information | Information about the user who performed the task |
Modify routing rules
On the Connected Resources tab of the Load Balancer Details page, you can modify the Listener’s routing rules.
To modify the Listener’s routing rules, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. Navigate to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
- From the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer list page.
- On the Load Balancer List page, click the resource you want to view details for. You will be taken to the Load Balancer Details page.
- On the Load Balancer Details page, click the Connected Resources tab.
- Click the Listener to add a lighting condition from the list of connected resources. You will be taken to the Listener Details page.
- On the Listener Details page, click the Edit icon of the Routing Rules item. The Edit Routing Rules popup window opens.
- After modifying the routing rule according to the routing action, click the Confirm button.
Category Required statusDetailed description Routing Action - Current routing method (cannot be modified) Routing condition Required If the routing action is LB server group forwarding, routing conditions can be modified - URL path: Modify request URL path and LB server group (up to 20 additions possible)
- Host header: Modify request host and LB server group (up to 20 additions possible)
Redirect target Required When the routing action is URL redirection, the redirect target can be modified - Path: the URL path can be changed
- Host: the host can be changed
- Protocol/Port: cannot be modified (only HTTP → HTTPS redirection is allowed)
Table. Listener routing rule modification items
Delete Listener
To delete an unused Listener, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu to go to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
- Click the Load Balancer menu on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Load Balancer List page.
- Load Balancer List page, click the Load Balancer resource whose Listener you want to delete. You will be taken to the Load Balancer Details page.
- On the Load Balancer Details page, click the Connected Resources tab. You will be taken to the Connected Resources tab page.
- On the Connected Resources tab page, click the Listener you want to delete. Navigate to the Listener Details page.
- On the Listener Details page, click the Delete Listener button.
Terminate Load Balancer
You can reduce costs by terminating unused Load Balancers. However, since this may affect application services, request termination only after thorough prior review.
In the following cases, the Load Balancer cannot be terminated.
- If there is a Listener attached to the Load Balancer: Delete the attached Listener on the Load Balancer Details page’s Connected Resources tab.
- If you are using a Public NAT IP on the Load Balancer: Load Balancer Details page’s Details tab, deselect the Public NAT IP that is in use.
- If you are using a Private NAT IP on the Load Balancer: Load Balancer Details page’s Details tab, deselect the Private NAT IP in use.
- If there are rules registered in the Firewall: delete the Firewall rules in use from the Load Balancer Details page’s Detailed Information tab.
- If connected to a PrivateLink Service: Check the connected Load Balancer on the PrivateLink Service Details page.
To cancel the Load Balancer, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer List page.
- Load Balancer List page, click the resource to terminate. You will be taken to the Load Balancer Details page.
- On the Load Balancer Details page, click the Terminate Service button.
- After termination is complete, check the resource termination status in the Load Balancer list.
3.2.1 - LB Server Groups
Users can create an LB server group through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and connect it to a Load Balancer’s listener.
Create LB server group
To create an LB server group, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu to go to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. You will be taken to the LB Server Group List page.
- On the LB Server Group List page, click the Create LB Server Group button. You will be taken to the Create LB Server Group page.
- On the Create LB Server Group page, enter the information required to create a service and select detailed options.
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description LB server group name Required LB server group resource name - Enter using English letters, numbers, and special characters (
-_) with a length of 3 to 63 characters
- LB server group name must be unique within the Account
VPC name Required Select the VPC to create the LB server group - Select the VPC where the Load Balancer that will connect to the LB server group is created
Service Subnet name Required Select the VPC Subnet to create the LB server group - Select the Subnet where the Load Balancer that will connect to the LB server group is created
Load balancing Required Load Balancing Algorithm Selection - Round Robin: Distribute sequentially among registered members
- Weighted round robin: Distribute sequentially in proportion to the weight assigned to each member
- Least Connection: Distribute to the member with the fewest connections
- Weighted least connection: Distribute to the higher‑priority member considering each member’s weight and connection count
- IP Hash: Distribute to a specific member based on the hash value of the client IP address
Protocol Required Select the receiving protocol for the LB server group - Select the protocol to forward to members of the LB server group
LB health check Required Select LB health check - Select an LB health check that was created in the same Service Subnet as the LB server group
Table. LB server group service information input fields - Enter using English letters, numbers, and special characters (
- Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description Explanation Select Enter resource description tag Select Add tags - Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
Table. LB server group additional information input fields
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
- Check the created service information and the estimated billing amount, and click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, verify the created resources on the LB server group list page.
Check detailed information of LB server group
In the LB Server Group menu, you can view and edit the resource list and detailed information. The LB Server Group Details page consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Operation History tabs.
To view detailed information about the LB server group, follow these steps.
Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
On the Service Home page, click the LB server group menu. You will be taken to the LB server group list page.
- You can modify column visibility by clicking the Settings button at the top right of the table.
Category Display optionDetailed description LB server group name Basic LB server group resource name Protocol Basic LB server group protocol Load Balancer name Basic Load Balancer resource name linked to the LB server group LB Health Check ID Basic LB server group’s LB health check resource name Number of members Basic Number of members registered in the LB server group Creation date and time Basic LB server group creation time status Basic LB server group resource status Table. LB server group list items
- You can modify column visibility by clicking the Settings button at the top right of the table.
On the LB server group list page, click the resource to view detailed information. It navigates to the LB server group details page.
- LB Server Group Details At the top of the page, status information and descriptions of additional features are displayed.
Category Detailed description status LB server group resource status - Active: The service is active and functioning normally
- Deleting: Processing service termination request
- Creating: Processing service creation request
- Error: Cannot determine current status due to an internal error
- If this status persists, please contact through the Support Center
- Editing: Processing service modification request
Delete LB server group Delete LB server group resource Table. LB server group status information and additional feature items
- LB Server Group Details At the top of the page, status information and descriptions of additional features are displayed.
Detailed Information
In the Detailed Information tab, you can view the detailed information of a resource from the LB server group list, and edit it if necessary.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | Resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Constructor | User requesting service creation |
| Creation date | Service creation date and time |
| Editor | User requesting service modification |
| Modification date and time | Service modification date and time |
| Load Balancer name | Load Balancer resource name connected to the LB server group
|
| LB server group name | LB server group name |
| VPC name | VPC resource name where the LB server group was created
|
| Service Subnet name | Subnet resource name where the LB server group is created
|
| Port | LB server group forwarding port |
| Protocol | LB server group forwarding protocol |
| Load balancing | LB server group traffic distribution method
|
| LB health check | LB health check resource name
|
| description | LB server group addition description
|
Connected resources
Connected Resources tab allows you to view the list of members connected to the LB server group, and you can add or delete members.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Add member | Add LB Server Group Member button |
| Member name | Member name (server name) added to the LB server group |
| IP address | Member IP address |
| Port | Member receive port |
| weight | Load balancing weight
|
| Activation | Member activation status
|
| Creation date and time | Member addition date/time |
| Health check status | Health check status information
|
| status | Member resource status |
tag
On the LB server group list page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
Work History tab allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Work history | Task execution details |
| Operation date and time | Task execution date and time |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| Resource Name | LB server group name |
| Operation result | Task execution result (success/failure) |
| Operator Information | User information of the performed operation |
Managing LB Server Group Resources
You can view the member list of an LB server group and add or remove members.
Add member
You can add members to the LB server group to register server resources that will handle client requests.
To add a member to the LB server group, follow these steps.
Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu to go to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. You will be taken to the LB Server Group List page.
On the LB Server Group List page, click the resource you want to edit detailed information for. You will be taken to the LB Server Group Detail page.
On the LB Server Group Details page, click the Connected Resources tab. You will be taken to the Connected Resources tab page.
On the Connected Resources tab page, click the Add Member button in the upper right.
Add Member After entering the required information in the popup window, click the Confirm button.
Category Required statusDetailed description LB server group name basic LB server group name for adding a member target server Required Server information to add as a member - Virtual Server/Bare Metal Server: Select from the list of servers created in the same VPC as the LB server group
- Enter IP Directly: Enter server IP directly
- Click the Add button to add the target server
Member information Required Member Port and Weight Settings - Member Name: Display the server name and IP to be added as a member
- Port: The port the member will receive
- Weight: The weight applied to load balancing
- When using Weighted Round Robin or Weighted Least Connection load balancing, a value between 1 ~ 1000 is required
Table. LB server group member addition itemClick the OK button in the alert dialog.
Check if members have been added in the Connected Resources tab.
Add the following rule to the Security Group of the server added as a member to allow communication between the Load Balancer and the LB server group members.
- (Direction) Inbound rule, (Target address) Load Balancer’s Source NAT IP, (Protocol) LB server group protocol, (Allowed port) member port
- If the LB server group is in Creating, Editing, Deleting, Error state, you cannot add members.
- If the number of members that can be created in the Account to which the LB server group belongs is exceeded, you cannot add members. The maximum number of members that can be created in a single Account is 1,000.
- Through VPC Peering, you can add a server created in another VPC as a member. After adding the target server by Enter IP Directly, check the Health Check Status of the added member in the Connected Resources tab.
For detailed information, refer to VPC > VPC Peering.
Member Edit
When you click a member name in the member list, you are taken to the Member Details page. You can view the member details, and you can click the Edit icon to change the information.
To edit member details, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu to go to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. You will be taken to the LB Server Group List page.
- On the LB Server Group List page, click the resource you want to edit details for. You will be taken to the LB Server Group Details page.
- On the LB Server Group Details page, click the Connected Resources tab. You will be taken to the Connected Resources tab page.
- Linked Resources tab page, click the member you want to edit. You will be taken to the Member Details page.
- Edit the desired member information on the Member Details page.
Weight modification
It can be modified when using weighted load balancing (Weighted Round Robin, Weighted Least Connection).
- Click the Edit icon of the Weight item. In the edit window, enter the weight to edit and click the Confirm button.
Port modification
To edit a member port, click the Edit icon in the Port field. In the edit window, enter the port to edit and click the Confirm button.
Activate edit
To modify member activation, click the Edit icon of the Activation item. In the edit window, set the activation status and click the Confirm button.
Delete member
To delete unused members, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. You will be taken to the LB Server Group List page.
- On the LB Server Group List page, click the resource whose details you want to edit. You will be taken to the LB Server Group Details page.
- On the LB Server Group Details page, click the Connected Resources tab. You will be taken to the Connected Resources tab page.
- Linked Resources tab page, click the member you want to delete. You will be taken to the Member Details page.
- On the Member Details page, click the Delete Member button.
- Check whether the member has been deleted in the Connected Resources tab.
Terminate LB server group
You can terminate an unused LB server group. However, because it may affect the application service, please request termination only after thorough prior review.
The LB server group cannot be terminated in the following cases.
- If the LB server group is being used in a Listener: modify the Listener’s LB server group before deleting the LB server group.
- If there are members registered in the LB server group: Delete all resources attached to the LB server group before terminating the LB server group.
- When using an LB server group in an Auto Scaling Group: configure the load balancer so it is not used by the Auto Scaling Group, or adjust it so that the LB server group is not utilized. For more details, see Auto-Scaling Group > Load Balancer Usage.
To terminate the LB server group, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the LB Server Group menu. You will be taken to the LB Server Group List page.
- From the LB server group list, click the resource to be terminated. You will be taken to the LB server group detail page.
- On the LB server group detail page, click the LB server group delete button.
- Once the termination is complete, check the resource termination status in the LB server group list.
3.2.2 - LB Health Check
Users can create LB health checks through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and use them for LB server groups.
Create LB health check
To create an LB health check, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the LB Health Check menu. You will be taken to the LB Health Check List page.
- On the LB Health Check List page, click the Create LB Health Check button. You will be directed to the Create LB Health Check page.
- On the LB Health Check Creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category RequiredDetailed description LB health check name Required LB health check resource name - Enter using English uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (
-_) with a length of 3 to 63 characters
- LB health check name must be unique within the Account
VPC name Required Select the VPC to create the LB health check - Select the VPC where the LB server group that will use the LB health check is created
Service Subnet name Required Select the VPC Subnet to create the LB health check - Select the Subnet where the LB server group that will use the LB health check is created
Health check method > Protocol Required Health Check Protocol - Select the protocol to use for member health checks among TCP, HTTP
Health check method > Health check port Required Health check port - Enter a value between 1 and 65,534 to use as the member health check port
Health check method > interval Required Health check interval - Default is 5 seconds, input allowed between 1 and 180 seconds
Health check method > waiting time Required Health check response wait time - Default 5 seconds, can be set between 1 and 180 seconds
- Cannot be set to a value larger than the interval
Health check method > detection count Required Number of times to evaluate health check status - Default value 3 times, input allowed between 1 and 10
Health check method > HTTP method Required Set HTTP request method (HTTP protocol usage setting) - Select GET or POST
Health check method > URL monitor Required Enter health check URL path (set when using HTTP protocol) - Enter using English letters, numbers, and special characters (
/.-_?&=) within 50 characters
Health check method > Response code Required Enter the HTTP response codes to receive from the server (HTTP protocol when used) - Enter response codes in the 200 ~ 500 range
Health check method > request string Required Health check request string input (HTTP protocol POST method setting) - Enter the content to include in the Request Body using English letters, numbers, and special characters (
/.-_?&=) within 255 bytes
Table. LB health check service information input items - Enter using English uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and special characters (
- In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category Required statusDetailed description description Select Enter resource description tag Select Add tags - Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
Table. LB server group additional information input fields
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
- Summary Check the service information and estimated charges created in the panel, and click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, check the created resources on the LB Health Check List page.
Add the following rule to the Security Group of the server added as a member for member health checks in the Load Balancer.
- (Direction) Inbound rule, (Target address) Load Balancer’s health check IP, (Protocol) health check protocol, (Allowed port) health check port
- It is recommended to set the health check port the same as the member port.
- If the health check port and the member port differ, the health check is performed using the member port.
Configure the LB health check to a value that members added to the LB server group can respond to.
- Since the Load Balancer determines member status based on health check responses, the LB health check results may differ from the actual service status.
View detailed LB health check information
In the LB Health Check menu, you can view and edit the resource list and detailed information. The LB Health Check Details page consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed LB health check information, follow these steps.
Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
On the Service Home page, click the LB Health Check menu. You will be taken to the LB Health Check List page.
- You can modify the column visibility by clicking the Settings button at the top right of the table.
Category Display optionDetailed description LB health check name Basic LB health check resource name Service Subnet ID Basic VPC Subnet name where the LB health check was created Number of LB server groups Basic Number of LB server groups using LB health check type Basic LB Health Check Type Protocol Basic LB health check protocol Creation date and time Basic LB health check creation timestamp status Basic LB health check resource status Table. LB health check list items
- You can modify the column visibility by clicking the Settings button at the top right of the table.
On the LB Health Check List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the LB Health Check Details page.
- LB Health Check Details At the top of the page, status information and descriptions of additional features are displayed.
Category Detailed description status LB health check resource status - Active: The service is active and functioning normally
- Deleting: Processing service termination request
- Creating: Processing service creation request
- Error: Unable to determine current status due to an internal error
- If this status persists, please contact the Support Center
- Editing: Processing service modification request
Delete LB health check Delete LB health check resource Table. LB health check status information and additional feature items
- LB Health Check Details At the top of the page, status information and descriptions of additional features are displayed.
Detailed Information
Details tab allows you to view the resource’s detailed information from the LB health check list, and edit the information if needed.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| constructor | User requesting service creation |
| Creation date and time | Service creation date and time |
| Editor | Service modification request user |
| Modification date and time | Service modification date and time |
| LB health check name | LB health check name |
| type | LB health check type |
| VPC name | VPC to use for LB health check
|
| Service Subnet name | VPC Subnet for LB health checks
|
| Health check method | LB health check method configuration information
|
| description | Additional information about LB health check
|
Connected resource
In the Connected Resources tab, you can view detailed information about the LB server groups associated with the LB Health Check.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| LB server group name | LB server group resource name
|
| Protocol | LB health check protocol |
| Load Balancer name | Load Balancer resource name linked to the LB server group |
| Number of members | Number of members added to the LB server group |
| Creation date and time | LB server group creation timestamp |
| status | LB server group resource status
|
tag
LB health check list page lets you view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
Work History tab allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Work history | Task execution details |
| Operation Date/Time | Execution date and time |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| Resource Name | LB health check name |
| Work result | Task execution result (success/failure) |
| Operator Information | User information of the performed operation |
Modify LB health check method
LB Health Check Details page allows you to modify the health check method.
To modify the LB health check method, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the LB Health Check menu. You will be taken to the LB Health Check List page.
- LB Health Check List page, click the resource you want to edit details for. You will be taken to the LB Health Check Details page.
- On the LB Health Check Details page, click the Edit icon of the Health Check Method. You will be taken to the Edit Health Check Method popup.
- Modify health check method After editing the required information in the popup window, click the Confirm button.
Cancel LB health check
You can cancel the LB health check service you are not using.
- default type LB health check resource cannot be deleted.
- LB health check resources used by the LB server group cannot be deleted.
To disable the LB health check, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Load Balancer menu. You will be taken to the Load Balancer’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the LB Health Check menu. You will be taken to the LB Health Check List page.
- Click the resource to terminate from the LB health check list. You will be taken to the LB health check details page.
- On the LB Health Check Details page, click the Delete LB Health Check button.
- Once the termination is complete, check the resource termination status in the LB health check list.
3.3 - API Reference
3.4 - CLI Reference
3.5 - Release Note
Load Balancer
- A feature has been added to enable setting a Private NAT IP on the Service IP.
- The ‘TCP_Proxy’ protocol has been added to the L4 Listener.
- The conditions for creating L4 Listener service ports have been changed.
- It has been changed to allow creating a Listener on the same service port for both TCP and UDP protocols.
- The method for entering L7 Listener routing rules has been changed.
- LB server group forwarding > Modified to allow users to add a ‘/’ path in the URL path.
- LB server group forwarding > The matching method for the entered path in the URL path has been changed from ‘Contains(Include match)’ to ‘Starts with(Start part match)’.
- LB server group forwarding > The ‘Default’ condition for the request host in the host header has been added.
- The method for configuring the LB health check port has been changed.
- You can select either a member port or manual entry, and when using manual entry, specify the port to use.
- Existing LB health checks are changed to the member port. (Same as the current health check method)
- The HTTPS option has been added to the LB health check protocol.
- You can monitor the server’s TLS connection status.
- When using URL redirection in an HTTP Listener, you can specify the target port for the redirection.
- You can add Multi-node GPU Cluster resources to the LB server group members.
- When creating a Load Balancer, you can set the Source NAT IP and health check IP.
- TLS protocol has been added to the L4 Listener.
- You can set up a TLS service over TCP.
- A routing rule option has been added to the L7 Listener.
- Routing conditions allow you to set up branching by URL path or by host.
- Supports multiple SSL certificates.
- By supporting SNI, you can register multiple certificates on a single Listener.
- Add LB health check management feature
- You can create an LB health check, define the required health check method, and connect it to an LB server group for use.
- Support for weighted load balancing of LB server groups
- Weighted Round Robin and Weighted Least Connection have been added to the load balancing options.
- You can set per-member weights to distribute server load.
- Add LB server group member activation feature
- You can choose to activate members of the LB server group by disabling or enabling them.
- A Load Balancer service that provides more stable and enhanced features has been launched.
- Provides an L7 Load Balancer that supports HTTP and HTTPS protocols.
- Provides an L4 Load Balancer that supports TCP and UDP protocols.
4 - DNS
4.1 - Overview
Service Overview
The DNS service converts domain names, which are convenient for humans to recognize, into numeric IP addresses that the system can identify, allowing access to services.
With the DNS service, users can easily register the desired domain and manage its DNS records themselves.
Features
- Easy Domain Registration: You can register and modify new domains via a web-based console. Without building separate DNS infrastructure or installing DNS solutions, you can easily create and manage domains through the web.
- Support for Various Records: You can configure various resource record types such as A, AAAA, CNAME, TXT, MX, SPF, and it automatically scales to handle large query volumes without user intervention.
- Convenient Hosting Environment Management: You can select and use a Public domain name, which is exposed to the Internet to provide web services, or a Private domain name, which is accessible only to designated internal users without an Internet connection, according to your usage environment and purpose.
Configuration diagram
Provided features
The DNS service provides the following functions.
- Hosting Zone Creation/Management: You can create and manage Public Hosted Zones that are accessible from anywhere via the Internet, and Private Hosted Zones that are not exposed to the Internet and are only accessible within a designated network environment.
- Public Domain Name Application: You can apply for a Public Domain Name that can be accessed from anywhere via the Internet.
- Support for various resource records: You can select and use record types that suit your environment and purpose.
| Record type | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| A | Specify the IPv4 address corresponding to the domain name so that the IP address can be resolved from the domain name. |
| AAAA | Specify the IPv6 address corresponding to the domain name so that the IP address can be resolved from the domain name. |
| TXT | Set text information for the domain |
| CNAME | Assign an alias for the domain name |
| MX | Specify the mail server for the user’s domain and subdomains |
| SPF | To prevent spam mail, verify the sending mail server’s IP address or domain name, etc. (Sender Policy Framework) |
| NS | Name server responsible for this domain (auto-generated) |
| SOA | Define the domain’s initial information (the starting point of authority) (auto-generated) |
Component
Private DNS
To manage private domain names for use only within a designated network environment without exposing them to the internet, you must first create a Private DNS. The Private DNS name is used uniformly across all regions within the account. It can be initially created in any region of the account, and later it can be activated in other regions using the same Private DNS name from the Private DNS list. You can select the VPC to connect to Private DNS for each region. By using a common Private DNS name, you can share and manage the Private Hosted Zone information across all regions.
Hosted Zone
Private Hosted Zone allows you to create and manage domain names that can be used only in the network environment designated for VPCs connected to Private DNS. A Public Hosted Zone can manage the public domain name created through the Samsung Cloud Platform. Through a Hosted Zone, you can create and edit records that match your intended use.
Public Domain Name
You can apply for a Public Domain Name in partnership with Whois, the public domain name management provider. Public Domain Name can be purchased in one-year increments, and you can set or change the automatic renewal (in one-year increments) up to 7 days before the expiration date.
Constraints
The constraints of the DNS service are as follows.
| Category | description |
|---|---|
| Number of Private DNS that can be created per account | 1 |
| Number of Hosted Zones that can be created in an Account | 20 |
| Number of records that can be registered per Hosted Zone | 100 |
- Requests to use Public Domain Name and Public Hosted Zone in the Korea South (kr-south) region are restricted.
Preceding Service
The DNS service has no prerequisite services.
4.1.1 - TLD List
TLD (Top-Level Domain) list
The following TLDs are available. When applying for a Public Domain Name, an annual fee is incurred that varies by TLD type.
| TLD type | Public Domain Name registration fee (KRW/year, VAT excluded) |
|---|---|
| .COM | 20,000 |
| .NET | 20,000 |
| .ORG | 20,000 |
| .KR | 24,000 |
| .PE.KR | 16,000 |
| .BIZ | 20,000 |
| .INFO | 20,000 |
| .CN | 65,000 |
| .TV | 90,000 |
| .IN | 65,000 |
| .EU | 80,000 |
| .AC | 286,000 |
| .TW | 100,000 |
| .MOBI | 44,000 |
| .NAME | 30,000 |
| .CC | 90,000 |
| .JP | 198,000 |
| .ASIA | 55,000 |
| .ME | 44,000 |
| .TEL | 44,000 |
| .PRO | 44,000 |
| .SO | 103,000 |
| .SX | 90,000 |
| .CO | 100,000 |
| .XXX | 200,000 |
| .PW | 44,000 |
| .PH | 100,000 |
| .io | 91,000 |
| .app | 42,500 |
| .co.kr | 24,000 |
4.1.2 - ServiceWatch Metrics
DNS sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by default monitoring are data collected at 5‑minute intervals.
Basic Metrics
The following are the basic metrics for the Private DNS namespace.
The indicators whose names are displayed in bold below are the key indicators selected from the basic indicators provided by Private DNS. Key metrics are used to configure service dashboards that are automatically built for each service in ServiceWatch.
Each metric indicates, via the user guide, which statistical values are meaningful when viewing that metric, and among the meaningful statistics, the values shown in bold are the primary statistics. In the service dashboard, you can view key metrics using these primary statistical values.
| Performance items | Detailed description | unit | Meaningful statistics |
|---|---|---|---|
| privatedns.operation.per_sec | Number of UDP-based data requests processed per second on user request | Count/Second |
|
| privatedns.query.outbound.per_sec | Number of requests per second sent to external DNS servers for user queries | Count/Second |
|
| privatedns.query.answers_slow | Number of requests sent to external DNS servers for user queries with slow responses (within 1 second) | Count/Second |
|
| privatedns.response.nxdomain.per_sec | Number of NXDOMAIN responses received per second from external DNS servers for user queries | Count/Second |
|
| privatedns.response.servfail.per_sec | Number of SERVFAIL responses received per second from external DNS servers for user queries | Count/Second |
|
4.2 - How-to guides
The user explains the items to verify before creating a DNS service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Preface before Using Private Domain Name Management
Before using Private Domain Name management, first verify the following items.
- To manage private domain names for use only within a designated network environment without exposing them to the internet, you must first create a Private DNS.
- The defined Private DNS name is used uniformly across all regions within the account. It can be initially created in any region within the account, and thereafter, in other regions, it is activated and used from the Private DNS list with the same Private DNS name.
- You can optionally configure the VPCs you want to connect to Private DNS for each region. When first created or activated, no VPC is connected.
- The Private DNS name may already be in use within the Samsung Cloud Platform, and you can verify its availability by performing a duplicate check when entering the domain name.
- Hosted Zone information is shared across all regions. However, some detailed information (SRN, creator, modifier information) can only be viewed in the region where it was originally created.
General usage examples are shown below. For detailed usage instructions, refer to the How-to guides of the respective subservice.
| Order | Subservice | Key procedures |
|---|---|---|
| STEP 1 | Private DNS | Create Private DNS (Region A) → Connect VPC in Region A → Activate Private DNS (Region B) → Connect VPC in Region B |
| STEP 2 | Hosted Zone | Create Private Hosted Zone → Register record |
| STEP 3 | - | View detailed information, edit, and cancel |
Public Domain Name Management: Foreword Before Use
Before using Public Domain Name management, please check the following items first.
- Public Domain Names intended for use on the internet can be managed through a Hosted Zone only for domain names that have been registered via the Samsung Cloud Platform.
- The list of available top-level domains may change.
An example of the typical usage procedure is shown below. For detailed usage instructions, refer to the How-to guides of the respective subservice.
| Category | Subservice | Main Procedure |
|---|---|---|
| STEP 1 | Public Domain Name | Verify availability and apply for the Public Domain Name you wish to use |
| STEP 2 | Hosted Zone | Create a Hosted Zone for the requested Public Domain Name → Register records |
| STEP 3 | - | View detailed information, edit, cancel |
4.2.1 - Private DNS
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Private DNS service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create Private DNS
You can create and use a Private DNS service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request the creation of a Private DNS service, follow the steps below.
- All Services > Networking > DNS Click the menu. Proceed to the Service Home page.
- Click the Private DNS Create button in the dropdown of the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Private DNS Create page.
- On the Private DNS Creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category RequiredDetailed description Private DNS name Required Enter the Private DNS name to use - Enter using 3 - 20 characters, including lowercase letters, numbers, and the special character (-)
- Cannot be the same as an existing name in use
VPC connection Select Register VPC to connect with Private DNS - Click the Select button to choose a VPC
- Up to 5 VPCs can be registered
Table. Private DNS service information input items - In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category Required statusDetailed description description Selection Enter additional information and description for Private DNS tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 per resource can be added
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
Table. Private DNS additional information input fields
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
- Check the creation history and click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, check the created resources on the Private DNS List page.
Check Private DNS detailed information
Private DNS service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. Private DNS Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view the detailed information of Private DNS, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Private DNS menu. You will be taken to the Private DNS List page.
- On the Private DNS List page, click the resource you want to view detailed information for. You will be taken to the Private DNS Details page.
- Private DNS Details page displays the status and detailed information of Private DNS, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description Service status Private DNS status - Creating: creating
- Activing: activating
- Active: active
- Inactive: inactive
- Editing: editing settings
- Deleting: deleting
- Error: error occurred
Service termination Button to disable Private DNS Table. Private DNS status information and additional features
- Private DNS Details page displays the status and detailed information of Private DNS, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
Private DNS List page allows you to view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if necessary.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource Name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Constructor | User who created the service |
| Creation date and time | Service creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who edited the service information |
| Modification date | Date and time the service information was modified |
| Initial creation location | Initial creation location of Private DNS |
| VPC connection | VPC information connected to Private DNS
|
| Explanation | Private DNS description
|
tag
Private DNS List page allows you to view the tag information of the selected resource, and to add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
Private DNS List page lets you view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Activating Private DNS from a location other than its initial creation location
You can enable and use Private DNS in regions other than the region where it was originally created.
To enable the Private DNS service, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Private DNS menu. You will be taken to the Private DNS List page.
- Click the More > Activate button of the resource you want to enable from the Private DNS list. A notification dialog will appear.
- The activation button is displayed only for Private DNS entries with Inactive status.
- Click OK in the alert dialog.
Configure VPC connection for Private DNS
You can configure the VPC information connected to the Private DNS service.
To configure the VPC connection for Private DNS, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Go to the DNS Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Private DNS menu. You will be taken to the Private DNS List page.
- On the Private DNS List page, click the resource you want to view detailed information for. You will be taken to the Private DNS Details page.
- On the Private DNS Details page, click the Edit icon of the VPC connection item. The VPC connection selection popup window opens.
- In the VPC connection selection popup window, select the VPC to connect and click OK.
- Check that the selected VPC is displayed in the VPC connection item.
Terminate Private DNS
You can request termination of the Private DNS service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request cancellation of the Private DNS service, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Private DNS menu. You will be taken to the Private DNS List page.
- On the Private DNS List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Private DNS Details page.
- On the Private DNS Details page, click the Cancel Service button.
- Once the termination is complete, check the service termination status in the Private DNS list.
4.2.2 - Hosted Zone
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Hosted Zone service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create Hosted Zone
You can create and use the Hosted Zone service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request the creation of a Hosted Zone service, follow the steps below.
All Services > Networking > DNS menu, click it. You will be taken to the Service Home page.
Click the Create Hosted Zone button in the dropdown of the Service Home page. Proceed to the Create Hosted Zone page.
Create Hosted Zone page, enter the information needed to create the service, and choose detailed options.
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description Usage classification Required Select a domain appropriate for the purpose of the Hosted Zone - Private: Domain that can be used only within the Samsung Cloud Platform
- Public: Domain that can be accessed from outside (the Internet)
Private DNS name to register Required Select from the pre-created Private DNS - Selectable only when Private is chosen in the usage classification
Hosted Zone name to register Required Enter the Hosted Zone name to use - Enter using lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens (-), within 2 to 63 characters
- When applying for a new domain, click the Check Availability button to verify duplication
Table. Hosted Zone service information input items - In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category Required statusDetailed description Explanation Select Enter additional information and description for the Hosted Zone tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 can be added per resource
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key and Value values
Table. Hosted Zone additional information input fields
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Check the generation history and click the Generate button.
- After creation is complete, check the created resources on the Hosted Zone list page.
Check Hosted Zone details
The Hosted Zone service allows you to view and edit the full list of resources and detailed information. Hosted Zone Details page consists of Details, Records, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed information about the Hosted Zone, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > DNS menu, click it. Then go to the Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Hosted Zone menu. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone List page.
- On the Hosted Zone List page, click the resource you want to view details for. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone Details page.
- Hosted Zone Details page displays the Hosted Zone’s status information and details, and consists of Details, Records, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description Service status Hosted Zone status - Creating: In progress
- Active: Running
- Editing: Changing settings
- Deleting: Terminating
- Error: An error occurred
Delete Hosted Zone Button to delete the Hosted Zone Table. Hosted Zone status information and additional features
- Hosted Zone Details page displays the Hosted Zone’s status information and details, and consists of Details, Records, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
On the Hosted Zone List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource Name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Constructor | User who created the service |
| Creation date and time | Service creation date and time |
| Editor | User who edited the service information |
| Modification date and time | Date and time the service information was modified |
| Hosted Zone name | Hosted Zone domain name |
| Usage classification | Display selected usage |
| Private DNS name | Selected Private DNS name |
| description | Hosted Zone description
|
record
On the Hosted Zone List page, you can view the registered record information and add, modify, or delete records. A record is an item that configures communication with the DNS server, informing the server of the IP address associated with the domain and how to handle requests sent to the domain.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Advanced Search | Record detailed search settings button |
| Add record | Add Record button |
| Name | Registered record name |
| type | Record Types
|
| value | IP address of the record |
| TTL | Time for DNS response servers to temporarily store records |
| Auto-generated | Indicate whether automatically generated |
| status | Service status display |
| More menu | Record editing and deletion are possible |
tag
Hosted Zone List page lets you view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
On the Hosted Zone List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Managing records of a Hosted Zone
You can add or delete records in the Hosted Zone service.
Add Record
To add a record to a Hosted Zone, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Hosted Zone menu. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone List page.
- On the Hosted Zone List page, click the resource you want to view details for. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone Details page.
- On the Hosted Zone Details page, click the Record tab. You will be taken to the Record tab page.
- Record tab page, click the Add Record button. The Add Record window opens.
- In the Add Record window, select the Type, Name, Value, and TTL fields, then click Confirm. A notification dialog will appear.
Category Detailed description A Enter an IP address in IPv4 format - Click the Add button to add an IP address, up to 8 can be registered
AAAA Enter an IPv6-formatted IP address - Click the Add button to add an IP address, up to 8 can be registered
SPF Enter the IP of the server that sent the spam email - If registering multiple servers, enter in the format v=spf1 ip4:211.214.160.28 ip4:211.214.16.29 ~all
CNAME Enter a record alias in domain name format - Registration is not possible if entered the same as a value of a different record type
MX Enter the priority and mail server address - Click the Add button to add a server address, up to 8 can be registered
- When entering priority, input a value within the range 0 - 65,535; the smaller the value, the higher the priority
TXT Enter text - Enter within 250 characters
Table. Detailed items by record type - Click Confirm in the notification dialog.
- Check that the added item appears in the record list.
Modify Record
To modify a Hosted Zone’s records, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Hosted Zone menu. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone List page.
- On the Hosted Zone List page, click the resource you want to view details for. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone Details page.
- On the Hosted Zone Details page, click the Record tab. You will be taken to the Record tab page.
- On the Record tab page, click the list’s More menu and select Edit. The Record Edit window opens.
- In the record edit window, modify the desired fields and click OK.
- Click OK in the notification dialog.
Delete Record
To delete a record in a Hosted Zone, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Hosted Zone menu. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone List page.
- On the Hosted Zone List page, click the resource to view its details. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone Details page.
- On the Hosted Zone Details page, click the Record tab. You will be taken to the Record tab page.
- Record tab page, click the More menu of the list and click Delete. A confirmation alert opens.
- Click Confirm in the alert dialog.
Terminate Hosted Zone
You can request cancellation of the Hosted Zone service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request termination of the Hosted Zone service, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Hosted Zone menu. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone List page.
- On the Hosted Zone List page, click the resource you want to view details for. You will be taken to the Hosted Zone Details page.
- On the Hosted Zone Details page, click the Hosted Zone Delete button.
- After the termination is complete, check the service termination status in the Hosted Zone list.
4.2.3 - Public Domain Name
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Public Domain Name service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create Public Domain Name
You can create and use the Public Domain Name service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request the creation of a Public Domain Name service, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > DNS Click the menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page.
- Click the Public Domain Name Create button in the dropdown of the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name Create page.
- On the Public Domain Name creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category Whether requiredDetailed description Domain name to register Required Enter the Public Domain Name to use - Enter using lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens (-), within 2 to 63 characters
- When applying for a new domain, click the Check Availability button to verify duplication
Purchase period Required Automatically selected as 1 year Automatic extension Required Set whether to automatically renew when the domain usage period expires - Use selected, enter detailed information
- Registrant Name (Business Name): Enter the registrant name or business name within 30 characters
- Registrant Email: Enter the registrant’s email address
- Registrant Address: Enter the registrant’s company address, click the Find Postal Code button to search and then enter the address
- Phone Number: Enter the registrant’s phone number
Table. Public Domain Name Service Information Input Items - In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category Required statusDetailed description Explanation Select Enter additional information and description for the Public Domain Name tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 per resource can be added
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
Table. Public Domain Name additional information input fields
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
- Check the creation history and click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Public Domain Name list page.
Check detailed information of Public Domain Name
The Public Domain Name service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. The Public Domain Name Details page consists of Details, Registration Info, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed information about the Public Domain Name, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > DNS menu, click it. You will be taken to the Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Public Domain Name menu. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name List page.
- Click the resource on the Public Domain Name List page to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name Details page.
- Public Domain Name Details page displays the status information and detailed information of the Public Domain Name, and consists of the Details, Registration Information, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description Service status Public Domain Name status - Creating: In progress
- Active: Running
- Editing: Settings being changed
- Registered: Renewal registration
- Transfer Requested: Domain transfer request completed
- Expired: Usage period expired
Domain transfer between accounts Domain transfer request button between accounts - Cancel Transfer Request: Allows canceling a domain transfer request after the request is completed
- Approve Transfer Request: Allows approving a transfer request when a domain transfer request is received
- Reject Transfer Request: Allows rejecting a transfer request when a domain transfer request is received
Table. Public Domain Name status information and additional features
- Public Domain Name Details page displays the status information and detailed information of the Public Domain Name, and consists of the Details, Registration Information, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
On the Public Domain Name List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource Name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| constructor | User who created the service |
| Creation date and time | Service creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who edited the service information |
| Modification date and time | Date and time the service information was modified |
| domain name | Public Domain Name domain name |
| Registration date | Public Domain Name domain registration date |
| Purpose classification | Display selected usage |
| Expiration date | Public Domain Name Domain Usage Expiration Date |
| Automatic extension | Display whether the auto-renewal feature is enabled
|
| description | Public Domain Name description
|
Registration Information
On the Public Domain Name List page, you can view and edit domain registration information.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Registrant name (business name) | The registrant’s name or business name entered when applying for the service |
| Registrant email | The email address of the registrant entered when applying for the service |
| Registrant address | The registered company’s address entered when applying for the service |
| phone number | Registrant’s phone number entered during service application |
tag
On the Public Domain Name List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the Public Domain Name List page.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Public Domain Request Transfer Between Accounts
You can transfer a registered Public Domain to a user of another account.
- If the domain you want to migrate is being used as a Hosted Zone, you cannot request migration. Delete the existing Hosted Zone first, then request migration.
- The domain you want to transfer must have auto-renewal set to unused to make a transfer request. After the domain transfer, you can enable auto-renewal in the account that received the transfer.
- Domain transfer requests can be made only up to one month before the domain’s registration expiration date.
To transfer Public Domain information to another account user, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Public Domain Name menu. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name list page.
- On the Public Domain Name List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name Details page.
- Public Domain Name Details on the page, click the Domain Transfer Between Accounts button. The Domain Transfer Between Accounts popup will open.
- Domain transfer between accounts In the popup window, enter the account ID to transfer to and click the Confirm button.
- When the domain transfer request is completed, it changes to the Transfer requested status, and the applicant can click the Cancel transfer request button to cancel the transfer request.
- After a domain transfer request, if a user from another account approves the transfer, the domain information is deleted from the requesting account.
- If the user who received the prior request does not approve within 7 days of the approval request, the prior request will be automatically canceled.
Managing Public Domain Data Transfer Requests
If a user from another account transfers a Public Domain, you can approve or reject the request.
Approve Public Domain information transfer request
To approve a request to move to the Public Domain, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Public Domain Name menu. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name List page.
- Public Domain Name List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name Details page.
- Public Domain Name Details on the page, click the Approve Previous Request button. In the alert dialog, click the Confirm button.
Public Domain Reject request to transfer information
To reject a request before the Public Domain, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Public Domain Name menu. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name List page.
- Public Domain Name List page: click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name Details page.
- On the Public Domain Name Details page, click the Reject Previous Request button. In the alert dialog, click the Confirm button.
Modify registration information of Public Domain Name
You can modify the registration information of a Public Domain Name.
To edit the registration information of a Public Domain Name, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > DNS menu. Navigate to the DNS Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Public Domain Name menu. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name List page.
- On the Public Domain Name List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Public Domain Name Details page.
- On the Public Domain Name Details page, click the Registration Information tab. You will be taken to the Registration Information tab page.
- Registration Information tab page, click the Edit button. You will be taken to the Edit Registration Information page.
- Go to the Edit Registration Information page. Modify the desired items and click the Done button.
4.3 - Release Note
DNS
- You can view measurement values for the following five items in conjunction with Service Watch.
- Number of server error responses (unit: seconds)
- NXDOMAIN response count (unit: seconds)
- Number of queries not responding within 1 second (unit: seconds)
- Number of outgoing UDP queries (unit: seconds)
- Number of UDP-based data request processing (unit: seconds)
- Through the Samsung Cloud Platform, a registered Public Domain Name can be transferred to another user account within the allowed period.
- We have officially launched a DNS service that can be used in private networks and internet environments. You can manage Private DNS and Private Hosted Zones for restricted networks, and apply for Public Domain Name registration and manage Public Hosted Zones for internet environments.
- We have launched a beta DNS service that offers domain registration request and management capabilities based on user requests.
5 - VPN
5.1 - Overview
Service Overview
VPN (Virtual Private Network) is a service that connects the customer’s network to the Samsung Cloud Platform via an encrypted virtual private network.
Features
Prompt Service Delivery You can configure automated services through a web-based console, and after creating a service, you can use the VPN service immediately without any waiting time.
Thorough Secure Connection You can securely connect from a customer’s external network to the customer’s internal network built on the Samsung Cloud Platform via encrypted virtual tunneling using a performance‑ and reliability‑validated IPsec VPN.
Simple operating environment You can easily and quickly manage web-based deployment, capacity provisioning, and service updates without the need for a complex network environment setup.
Efficient Service Use You can manage costs efficiently because you only pay for the amount of service used, without any separate installation fees.
Provided features
VPN provides the following features.
- Provide virtual tunneling encrypted with IPsec
- Compatible VPN: Secui – Bluemax (TG360),Paloalto,Axgate,Cisco-router/ASA/Meraki, Checkpoint,AWS,Azure,Vmware NSX-T
- Create Virtual Private Gateway
- Create a gateway to connect the customer’s network to a private network that cannot be accessed from outside.
- Create VPN Tunnel
- Select IPsec VPN Gateway (maximum of 5 VPN tunnels per VPN Gateway)
- In an IPsec VPN Gateway high-availability configuration, the Standby device automatically operates when a failure occurs on the Active device.
Constraints
| Category | Default quota | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| VPN Gateway | 3 | Up to three can be created per account |
| VPN Tunnel | 5 | Up to 5 can be created per VPN Gateway |
Provision status by region
VPN is available in the environments below.
| Region | Provision status |
|---|---|
| Korea West (kr-west1) | Provide |
| Korea East (kr-east1) | Provide |
| South Korea South 1 (kr-south1) | Not provided |
| South Korea South 2 (kr-south2) | Not provided |
| South Korea South 3(kr-south3) | Provide |
Preliminary Service
| Service Category | service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Networking | VPC | A service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment |
5.1.1 - ServiceWatch Metrics
VPN sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by default monitoring are data collected at a 1‑minute interval.
Basic Metrics
The following are the basic metrics for the VPN namespace.
The indicators whose names are displayed in bold below are the key indicators selected from the basic indicators provided by VPN. Key metrics are used to configure service dashboards that are automatically built for each service in ServiceWatch.
Each metric indicates, via the user guide, which statistical value is meaningful when viewing that metric, and among the meaningful statistics, the values shown in bold are the primary statistics. In the service dashboard, you can view key metrics using these primary statistical values.
| Performance items | Detailed description | unit | meaningful statistics |
|---|---|---|---|
| Network In Total Bytes _vpn_tunnel | Cumulative traffic volume heading from VPN → VPC | Bytes |
|
| Network Out Total Bytes _vpn_tunnel | Cumulative traffic volume from VPC → VPN | Bytes |
|
| Network In Total Bytes _vpn_tunnel_Delta | Cumulative traffic volume over 5 minutes from VPN → VPC | Bytes |
|
| Network Out Total Bytes _vpn_tunnel_Delta | Cumulative traffic volume over 5 minutes from VPC → VPN | Bytes |
|
5.2 - How-to guides
Create VPN
You can create and use a VPN service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create a VPN, follow these steps.
Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. You will be taken to the VPN Service Home page.
On the Service Home page, click the Create VPN button. You will be taken to the Create VPN page.
On the VPN creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description VPN Gateway name Required Enter VPN Gateway name - Enter using English letters and numbers, within 3 to 20 characters
Connected VPC name Required Select the VPC connected to the VPN Gateway - Click + New to create a VPC and then select it
Public IP Required Select the IP for communicating with the remote site from the VPN Gateway. Table. VPN Service Information Input ItemsEnter or select the required information in the Additional Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description Explanation Selection User additional description tag Selection Add Tag - Up to 50 can be added per resource
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values.
Table. VPN service additional information input fields
Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
- After creation is complete, check the created resources on the VPN List page.
Check VPN detailed information
The VPN service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. VPN Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed information about the VPN service, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. You will be taken to the VPN’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the VPN menu. You will be taken to the VPN List page.
- On the VPN List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the VPN Details page.
- VPC Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
On the VPN List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service status | Current status
|
| Service termination | Cancel VPN service |
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | VPN resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| constructor | User who created the service |
| Creation timestamp | Service creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who modified the service |
| Modification date and time | Date and time the service information was modified |
| VPN Gateway name | VPN Gateway name |
| Connected VPC name | VPC name connected to VPN |
| Public IP | IP information for communicating with remote sites from the VPN Gateway |
| Explanation | Additional description written by the user
|
tag
On the VPN List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
On the VPN Details page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Terminate VPN
You can terminate unused VPCs to reduce operating costs. However, terminating a service may cause the running service to stop immediately, so you should thoroughly consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with the termination.
- If there are resources connected to a VPN, such as a VPN Tunnel, they cannot be terminated.
- The VPN service cannot be canceled when its status is Creating or Editing.
To cancel the VPN, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. Go to the VPN Service Home page.
- From the Service Home page, click the VPN menu. You will be taken to the VPN List page.
- On the VPN List page, select the resource to cancel. Navigate to the VPN Details page.
- On the VPN Details page, click the Cancel Service button.
- Once the termination is complete, check on the VPN List page whether the resource has been terminated.
5.2.1 - VPN Tunnel
Create VPN Tunnel
In the Samsung Cloud Platform Console, you can configure IPSec Tunning with remote sites in the VPN service.
To create a VPN tunnel, follow these steps.
Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. Navigate to the VPN Service Home page.
On the Service Home page, click the Create VPN Tunnel button. You will be taken to the Create VPN Tunnel page.
On the VPN Tunnel creation page, enter the information required to create the service, and select detailed options.
Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description VPN Tunnel name Required Enter VPN Tunnel name - Enter using English letters and numbers, within 3 - 20 characters
VPC Gateway name Required Select the VPN Gateway to connect VPC name Basic Automatically input VPC information connected to the VPN Gateway Public IP Basic Automatic entry of IP information for communicating with remote sites from the VPN Gateway Peer VPN GW IP Required Enter the IP information of the remote VPN - Example: 192.168.10.0
Romote Subnet(CIDR) Required Enter the subnet address of the remote site to connect - After entering the IP address, click the Add button; you can add up to 10 entries
- Example: 20.0.0.0/24
Pre-shared Key Required Enter the shared key (PSK) to be used for IKE mutual authentication between VPN gateways - Enter between 8 and 64 characters
- It is recommended to use a 32-character alphanumeric string
Explanation Select User additional description Table. VPN Tunnel Service Information Input ItemsEnter or select the required information in the Tunnel Settings area.
Category RequiredDetailed description IKE Settings > IKE Version Required Select IKE version IKE Settings > Algorithm Settings Required Select Encryption Algorithm and Digest Algorithm, then click the Add button. IKE configuration > Diffie-Hellman Required Diffie-Hellman Group Selection IKE configuration > SA Lifetime Required Enter the VPN session (Security Association) lifetime IPSec Settings > Algorithm Settings Required Select Encryption Algorithm and Digest Algorithm, then click the Add button. IPSec Settings > Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) Required Select whether to use the PFS group IPSec Settings > Diffie-Hellman Required Diffie-Hellman group selection IPSec Settings > SA Lifetime Required Enter the VPN session (Security Association) lifetime Table. VPN Tunnel configuration itemsEnter the required information in the DPD additional settings area.
Category RequiredDetailed description DPD additional settings > DPD probe interval Required Enter DPD test interval - Enter a value between 1 and 3,600 seconds
Table. VPN Tunnel DPD Additional Settings Input ItemsIn the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category RequiredDetailed description tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 can be added per resource
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key and Value values
Table. VPN Tunnel additional information input fields
Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, check the created resource on the VPN Tunnel List page.
Check VPN Tunnel detailed information
VPN Tunnel service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. VPN Tunnel Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed VPN information, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. Navigate to the VPN Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Create VPN Tunnel button. You will be taken to the VPN Tunnel List page.
- On the VPN Tunnel List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the VPN Tunnel Details page.
- VPN Tunnel Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Status | Current status
|
| Delete VPN Tunnel | VPN Tunnel delete button |
Detailed Information
On the VPN Tunnel List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and, if necessary, edit the information.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | VPN resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| constructor | User who created the service |
| Creation date | Service creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who edited the service information |
| Modification date | Date and time the service information was modified |
| VPN Tunnel name | VPN Tunnel name |
| VPN Gateway name | VPN Gateway name |
| Public IP | Public IP information |
| Peer VPN GW IP | Peer VPN GW Information
|
| Remote Subnet (CIDR) | Remote Sunet information
|
| Pre-shared Key | Pre-shared Key information
|
| status | Current service connection status |
| description | VPN Tunnel additional description
|
| IKE | Click the Edit button to bulk edit configuration information. |
| IKE Version | IKE Version information |
| Encryption Algorithm/Digest Algorithm | Algorithm information |
| Diffie-Hellman | Diffie-Hellman information |
| SA LifeTime | SA LifeTime information |
| IPSec | Click the Edit button to bulk edit the configuration information. |
| Encryption Algorithm/Digest Algorithm | Algorithm information |
| Diffie-Hellman | Diffie-Hellman information |
| SA LifeTime | SA LifeTime information |
| Perfect Forward Secrecy(PFS) | PFS configuration information |
| DPD | DPD probe interval information
|
tag
On the VPN Tunnel List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
VPN Tunnel List page allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Delete VPN Tunnel
You can reduce operational costs by deleting unused VPC tunnels. However, deleting a tunnel may cause the running service to stop immediately, so you should carefully consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with the deletion.
To cancel the VPN, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > VPN menu. You will be taken to the VPN Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Create VPN Tunnel button. You will be taken to the VPN Tunnel List page.
- On the VPN Tunnel List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the VPN Tunnel Details page.
- VPN Tunnel Delete Click the button.
- After termination is complete, check the VPN Tunnel List page to see if the resource has been deleted.
5.3 - API Reference
5.4 - CLI Reference
5.5 - Release Note
VPN
- You can input up to 10 Romote Subnet (CIDR).
- A VPN service that connects the customer network to the Samsung Cloud Platform via an encrypted (IPSec) virtual private network has been launched.
6 - Firewall
6.1 - Overview
Service Overview
A firewall is a virtual logical firewall service that controls traffic occurring in the VPC and Load Balancer of Samsung Cloud Platform.
The resources that can be applied in the firewall are Internet Gateway, Direct Connect, and Load Balancer, and you can set rules for communication between the VPC and the Internet, and between the VPC and the customer network, enabling secure network management.
When a firewall is first created, it blocks all inbound and outbound traffic according to the default rule (Any Deny).
Users can specify an IP address, port, and protocol to create inbound/outbound rules, and only traffic permitted by the created rules can communicate.
Component
The components that make up a firewall are as follows.
| Component | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Applicable target | Resources to which the firewall will be applied
|
| Firewall size | Firewall is offered in five sizes according to rule quota
|
| Firewall rule |
|
Constraints
The Firewall of Samsung Cloud Platform has a rule quota (limit) that can be created per size. When creating a Firewall, it is created by default as Extra Small, and you can change the Firewall size on the Firewall Details page of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
| Size | Rule quota | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Extra Small | 5 | Maximum number of rules that can be created: 5 |
| Small | 100 items | Maximum number of rules that can be generated: 100 |
| Medium | 200 | Maximum number of rules that can be generated: 200 |
| Large | 500 | Maximum number of rules that can be generated: 500 |
| Extra Large | 1,000 items | Maximum number of rules that can be generated: 1,000 |
Preceding Service
This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating a Firewall service. Please refer to the user guide (reference link) provided below for details and prepare in advance.
| Service Category | Service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Networking | VPC | A service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment |
| Networking | Direct Connect | A service that quickly and securely connects the customer’s network with the Samsung Cloud Platform network. |
| Networking | Load Balancer | A service that distributes traffic across multiple servers to maintain stable service. |
6.2 - How-to guides
Users can create the Firewall service by entering the required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create Firewall
You can create and use a Firewall service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
The Firewall service must be enabled in the prerequisite service of Networking to be created. The enabled Firewall can be viewed in the Firewall list.
- Firewalls cannot be created independently, unlike other services in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To enable the firewall, follow these steps.
Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. Navigate to the Firewall’s Service Home page.
On the Service Home page, click the service you want to create. You will be redirected to the service creation page.
- VPC Creation: Configure the VPC service’s Internet Gateway and Transit Gateway firewall.
- When creating a VPC’s Internet Gateway service, set the Use Firewall option to Enabled. For detailed instructions, refer to Create Internet Gateway.
- Create a Transit Gateway service for the VPC and apply for the associated service of the Uplink Firewall. For detailed instructions, refer to Create Transit Gateway.
- Direct Connet Creation: When creating a Direct Connect service, set the Firewall Use option to Enabled. For detailed instructions, refer to Direct Connect 생성하기.
- Load Balancer Creation: When creating a Load Balancer service, set the Firewall Use option to Enabled. For detailed instructions, see Load Balancer Creation.
- VPC Creation: Configure the VPC service’s Internet Gateway and Transit Gateway firewall.
After the prerequisite service creation is complete, verify that the corresponding Firewall resource appears in the Firewall list.
Check firewall detailed information
The Firewall service can view and edit the full resource list and detailed information in the resource management menu.
To view detailed information about the firewall, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. Go to the Firewall’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. You will be taken to the Firewall List page.
- The Firewall List page shows the information below.
Category Detailed description Firewall name Automatically generated in the Firewall pre-service type_Firewall format Firewall classification Firewall pre-service type (Internet Gateway, Direct Connect, Load Balancer) Size User-selected Firewall size VPC name VPC name connected to the firewall Connection name Automatically generate in the format preceding service name_Firewall for services using Firewall. Number of rules Number of rules used on this firewall Whether to use Whether the firewall is used (enabled) or not used (disabled) - If not used, the Any Allow rule is applied and no charges are incurred for the firewall
status Firewall status display - More button can be clicked to set On/Off
Table. Firewall resource list items
- The Firewall List page shows the information below.
- On the Firewall List page, click the resource to view detailed information. It navigates to the Firewall Details page.
- Firewall Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Rules, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Category Detailed description Service status Firewall status display - Creating: In progress
- Active: Operational
- Editing: In progress
- Deploying: Completed
- Deleting: In progress
- Error: Occurred
Table. Firewall status information
- Firewall Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Rules, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Detailed Information
On the Firewall List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and, if necessary, edit the information.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource Name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Service’s unique resource ID |
| constructor | User who created the service |
| Creation date and time | Service creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who edited the service information |
| Modification date and time | Date and time the service information was modified |
| Firewall name | Automatically generated as the connection name for the resource name_Firewall |
| Firewall ID | Service’s unique resource ID |
| Firewall classification | Firewall prerequisite service types (Internet Gateway, Direct Connect, Load Balancer) |
| Size | The Firewall size selected by the user
|
| Firewall rule count/quota | The firewall’s rule quota and the number of rules currently in use |
| VPC name | VPC name connected to the Firewall
|
| VPC ID | VPC ID connected to the firewall |
| Connection name | {Firewall Prerequisite Service Name_Firewall} automatically generated
|
| Log saving option | Firewall log storage option
|
Rule
On the Firewall List page, you can view the rule list of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete rules.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Excel download | Download the currently entered rule list as an Excel (*.xlsx) file |
| Advanced Search | Search for rules that match the conditions set by the user
|
| Rule modification | Rules displayed in the rule list can be edited and deleted
|
| Add rule | Add new Firewall rule
|
| Order | Display rule order, apply top-down according to the rule order |
| Rule ID | Unique ID value for the rule
|
| Rule Index | Unique index value for the rule, used in log analysis |
| Source address | Origin address added to the rule |
| Destination address | Destination address added to the rule, displayed as the IP address according to the entered rule. |
| Service | Protocol and Destination Port |
| Operation | Traffic Allow/Deny distinction due to rules
|
| direction | Firewall traffic direction criteria
|
| Active status | Indicates whether the rule is active; if it is inactive, the rule does not operate. |
| status | Rule status display |
tag
Firewall List page lets you view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
On the Firewall List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Firewall Rule Management
You can add, modify, or delete firewall rules.
- You can add or modify rules only when the firewall status is Active.
- If you do not have permission to view the status in the preceding service, you cannot add a rule.
- The firewall periodically caches the domain rules registered by the user and retains the IP information for a certain period.
- If the cached result of the registered domain rule does not match the user’s IP, communication may be restricted.
Create Rule
In the Rules tab, you can directly input firewall rule information to add it.
To add a firewall rule, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. Navigate to the Firewall’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. You will be taken to the Firewall List page.
- On the Firewall List page, click the resource to which you want to add a rule. You will be taken to the Firewall Details page.
- On the Firewall Details page, click the Rules tab. You will be taken to the Rules tab page.
- Click the Add Rule button on the Rules tab. You will be taken to the Add Rule page.
- Enter the required information on the Manual Input tab page.
- After checking the added rules, click the Complete button.
| Category | Required? | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Rule location | Required | Specify the location of the rule to create |
| Rule ID to copy | Selection | Enter the Firewall rule ID to copy and click the Search button to select. |
| Source address | Required | Source addresses to add to the rule
|
| Destination address | Required | Select the type of destination address to add to the rule
|
| type | Required | Select protocol type to apply the rule
|
| Type > Protocol | Required | Select detailed protocol for the type
|
| Operation | Required | Traffic allow/deny classification based on rules
|
| Direction | Required | Firewall-based traffic direction
|
| Explanation | Selection | Additional description provided by the user |
| Added rule | - | Entered rules verification list
|
| Destination | Required | Destination address type to add to the rule
- Select IP or FQDN
- You can input multiple addresses at once, up to a maximum of 128, using CIDR (IP/Subnet Mask) format with commas (,) and ranges (-)
- Domain names can be entered in bulk using Comma(,) for up to 128 addresses at once
Batch create rules
To add multiple Firewall rules at once, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. Navigate to the Firewall’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. You will be taken to the Firewall List page.
- On the Firewall List page, click the resource to which you want to add a rule. You will be taken to the Firewall Details page.
- On the Firewall Details page, click the Rules tab. You will be taken to the Rules tab page.
- Click the Add Rule button on the Rule tab. You will be taken to the Add Rule page.
- Add Rule on the Batch Rule Input tab, click it.
- Please select the rule location. If you do not select a location, it will be added at the very last order of the rule.
- From File Selection, click the Download Form button. The bulk rule entry Excel file will be downloaded.
- Enter the rule information into the batch rule input Excel file, then save it.
- From File Selection, click Attach File to attach the Excel file you created, and click Add.
- You cannot upload if the attached Excel file format differs from the registration form or if the file is encrypted.
- You can upload up to 100 batch registration rules at a time. Uploads are not allowed if you exceed the maximum number of registration rules.
- If the number of rules set for the firewall size is exceeded, you cannot upload the file.
- Added rule Check that the rule you entered appears in the list and adjust its order.
- After checking the added rules, click the Complete button.
Modify Rules
You can select a firewall rule to view and edit its information.
To modify firewall rules, follow the steps below.
Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. Go to the Service Home page of Firewall.
On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. You will be taken to the Firewall List page.
Firewall List page, click the resource to edit the rule. You will be taken to the Firewall Details page.
On the Firewall Details page, click the Rules tab. You will be taken to the Rules tab page.
Click the Edit Rule button on the Rules tab. You will be taken to the Edit Rule page.
- On the rule edit page, you can configure the items below.
- Enable: Enables the selected rule.
- Disabled: Disables the selected rule. Disabled rules are not applied to preceding services.
- Delete: Delete the selected rule. Clicking Delete will mark the change as Pending Deletion.
- Cancel Deletion: If it is in a pending deletion state, you can cancel the rule deletion.
- On the rule edit page, you can configure the items below.
On the Edit Rule page, click the Edit button for the item you want to modify. The Edit Rule popup will open.
Rule Edit Enter the item you want to modify in the popup window and click the Confirm button.
Category Required? Detailed description Order - The order of rules can be changed by clicking Move Up/Move Down in the added rule list. Rule ID - Cannot be changed to a unique ID value for the rule Rule Index - Unique index value for the rule, usable in log analysis Source address Required Source addresses registered in the rule - in CIDR (IP/Subnet Mask) format, using commas (,) and ranges (-), can be entered and modified up to a maximum of 128 at once
Destination address Required Destination address to add to the rule - in CIDR (IP/Subnet Mask) format, using commas (,) and ranges (-) to input multiple addresses at once, up to a maximum of 128, for modification
type Required Set the protocol type according to the selected destination address entry Operation Required Traffic Allow/Deny classification can be changed by rules - Allow: Allow traffic when it matches the rule
- Deny: Block traffic when it matches the rule
direction Required The access direction of traffic defined by the firewall rule can be changed - Inbound: external → internal
- Outbound: internal → external
Rule location Required Rule position can be changed Active status Required Whether the rule is active; if it is disabled, the rule does not operate. status - State value for the rule description Select User-provided additional description Table. Detailed items for firewall rule modificationAfter reviewing the updated rules, click the Complete button.
Delete rule
To delete a firewall rule, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. Go to the Firewall’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. You will be taken to the Firewall List page.
- Click the resource to edit the rule on the Firewall List page. Navigate to the Firewall Details page.
- On the Firewall Details page, click the Rules tab. You will be taken to the Rules tab page.
- In the Rule tab, click the Edit Rule button. You will be taken to the Edit Rule page.
- On the Edit Rule page, select the rule to delete and click the Delete button.
- When the deletion request is completed, the change item will be marked as Scheduled for deletion.
- Click Cancel Deletion to cancel the rule deletion.
- On the Edit Rule page, click the Complete button.
Managing Firewall Resources
You can modify the firewall size and change the log usage settings.
Modify Firewall Size
To modify the size of the firewall, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. Go to the Firewall’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click Firewall List. You will be taken to the Firewall List page.
- Click the resource to edit on the Firewall List page. Navigate to the Firewall Details page.
- On the Firewall Details page, click the Size Edit icon. You will be taken to the Size Edit popup.
- Resize In the popup window, select the size to adjust, and click the Confirm button.
The firewall size is provided as the default Extra Small (rule quota 5), and you can change the firewall size to add firewall rules for use. For more details, refer to Firewall Constraints.
- Firewall fees are charged based on the size of the Firewall service and traffic throughput.
Using Log Storage
To store firewall logs, first create a bucket in Object Storage for the logs and configure that bucket in the log repository of Firewall Logging. Then, by setting log storage in the firewall detail view, firewall logs will be saved to the Object Storage bucket.
- The log storage settings can be checked in Firewall Logging. For more information, see Firewall Logging.
- If you configure a log repository, Object Storage charges for log storage will be applied.
To use firewall log storage, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. Go to the Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Firewall menu. You will be taken to the Firewall List page.
- Firewall List page, click the resource (Firewall) for which you want to enable log storage. You will be taken to the Firewall Details page.
- On the Firewall Details page, click the Edit icon of Log Save Setting. You will be taken to the Edit Log Save Setting popup.
- Modify Log Saving Option In the popup window, select Use for the log repository, and click the Confirm button.
Disable log storage
To set firewall log storage to disabled, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Firewall menu. You will be taken to the Firewall List page.
- Firewall List page, click the resource (Firewall) that does not use log storage. You will be taken to the Firewall Details page.
- Click the Modify Log Save Setting button. You will be taken to the Modify Log Save Setting popup.
- Modify Log Saving Option In the popup window, deselect Use for the log repository, and click the Confirm button.
- Notification Check the message in the popup window and click the Confirm button.
Disable Firewall
The Firewall service cannot be deleted on its own. Deleting the preceding service will also delete the associated Firewall. When you choose not to use the firewall while retaining the preceding service, you can set the firewall to an unused state on the firewall list page.
- If you change the firewall to an unused state, all previously registered rules will be deleted.
- You cannot delete a preceding service if there are firewall rules associated with it. Delete the firewall rules before deleting the preceding service.
To disable the firewall, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Firewall menu. You will be taken to the Firewall List page.
- On the Firewall List page, click More > Unused for the resources you want to mark as unused.
- After the usage change is completed, verify on the Firewall List page that the resource’s usage status has been changed to unused.
6.2.1 - Firewall Logging
To store firewall logs, first create a bucket in Object Storage for the logs and configure that bucket in the log repository of Firewall Logging. Then, on the Firewall Details page, set up log storage, and the firewall logs will be saved to the Object Storage bucket.
To save firewall logs, configure it according to the following steps.
- To store firewall logs, you can create a bucket in Object Storage or use an existing bucket. To create a bucket, refer to Create Object Storage.
- To set the bucket for the Firewall Logging log repository, refer to Firewall Logging 로그 저장소 사용하기.
- To set the log storage option to Enabled in the detailed view of the Firewall, refer to Using Firewall Log Storage.
Firewall Logging Configure log storage usage
To set the firewall’s log storage to enabled, you must first configure the log repository in Firewall Logging.
To enable the Firewall Logging log repository, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Management > Network Logging > Firewall Logging menu. Go to the Firewall Logging List page.
- On the Firewall Logging List page, click the top Log Storage Settings button. You will be taken to the Log Storage Settings popup.
- Log storage settings In the popup window, select the log storage bucket. When you select a bucket, the log storage path is displayed.
- Log storage settings In the popup window, after verifying Log storage bucket and Log storage path, click the Confirm button.
- Notification After reviewing the popup message, click the Confirm button.
View Firewall Logging List
If you configure the Firewall Logging log storage bucket, you can view the Firewall Logging list.
To view the Firewall Logging list, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Management > Network Logging > Firewall Logging menu. You will be taken to the Firewall Logging List page.
- On the Firewall Logging List page, verify the resources in use and the log storage targets.
Category Detailed description Resource ID Firewall ID Save target Firewall name Save registration date and time Firewall log repository registration timestamp Table. Firewall Logging list items
Check detailed information of Firewall Logging
Refer to the information below to view the detailed contents of the stored log.
Stored log example: 2024-10-11T11:23:43,deny,0,17,4.1.1.100,45499,192.168.10.10,53
| Category | description |
|---|---|
| 2024-10-11T11:23:43 | Date and time of the log occurrence (2024-10-11, 11:23:43) |
| deny | Action (deny / accept) |
| 0 | Firewall Rule ID (Policy ID) that generated the log |
| 17 | IP Protocol ID
|
| 4.1.1.100 | Source IP |
| 45499 | Departure Port |
| 192.168.10.10 | Destination IP |
| 53 | Destination Port |
Firewall Logging Configure to not use log storage
In Firewall Logging, you can set the log repository to unused.
Firewall Logging To disable the log repository, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Management > Network Logging > Firewall Logging menu. You will be taken to the Firewall Logging List page.
- Firewall Logging List page, click the top Log Storage Settings button. You will be taken to the Log Storage Settings popup.
- Log storage settings In the popup window, select Log storage bucket as Not used, and click the Confirm button.
- Log storage settings can be changed when no log storage target is configured.
- To change the log storage bucket, first set it to disabled. Then you can modify it by re-enabling it.
6.2.2 - Migration Rules
Users can retrieve rules created in the V1 environment of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and apply them to the V2 service.
Get firewall rules
You can import rules created in the V1 environment of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and migrate them to the V2 service for use.
- When a firewall rule is transferred using the Migration feature, the Migration label appears before its name.
- If a firewall rule description exceeds 100 characters, part of the description will be truncated and appended.
- Rules that exceed the maximum quantity are not registered due to rule quantity limits based on firewall size.
To retrieve the V1 firewall rules, follow these steps.
All Services > Networking > Firewall Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Firewall.
On the Service Home page, click the Migration Rules menu. 2. Go to the Migration Rules page.
Select the rule information to retrieve from the Migration Rules page and click Done.
Category Detailed description Original rule environment SCP v1 (Vmware) Auto-select Applicable target Select the Firewall list in the account to which the transferred rule will be applied Get rules Click the File Attachment button to upload the decrypted Firewall rule file - After decrypting and saving the rule file extracted from the original environment, upload
Rule List View uploaded Firewall rule file details - Move Up: Move the selected rule up in the list
- Move Down: Move the selected rule down in the list
- Delete: Delete the selected rule
- Edit: Modify the selected rule information; see Edit Transferable Firewall Rule for details
Rule location Set the position of the selected firewall rule - After the last rule: Move the selected rule after the last rule
- Set before the specified rule / Set after the specified rule: Enter the rule ID to move the selected rule before or after the specified rule
Table. Migration Rules detailed itemsAfter the firewall rule transfer request is completed, verify that the transferred item has been added to the firewall list.
Modify the Firewall rule to be transferred
You can edit each item when retrieving rules created in the V1 environment of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To edit the Firewall rules to be imported from V1, follow these steps.
Click the All Services > Networking > Firewall menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of the Firewall.
On the Service Home page, click the Migration Rules menu. 2. Go to the Migration Rules page.
Click Attach file in the rule import item to upload the Firewall rule file.
In the rule list, click Edit for the rule item you want to modify.
Category Required or not Detailed description origin address Essential Source addresses to add to the rule - in CIDR (IP/Subnet Mask) format, using commas (,), ranges (-) to input multiple addresses, up to a maximum of 128 at once
Destination address Essential Select the type of destination address to add to the rule - IP: In CIDR (IP/Subnet Mask) format, you can enter multiple addresses at once using commas (,) and ranges (-), up to a maximum of 128.
- Domain: In FQDN format, you can enter up to 128 full domain names at once using commas (,).
- The type items vary depending on the selected destination address format.
type Required Select protocol type to which the rule will be applied - Select destination port/Type: Select protocol type
- Internet Protocol: Enter protocol numbers, up to 128 entries allowed
- All: Select destination port/Type and protocol for the entire range, meaning all ports for all protocols
Type > Protocol Required Select detailed protocol for the type - Select the desired protocol among TCP, UDP, and ICMP; input fields vary depending on the selected protocol
- When ICMP is selected in the protocol, you can set the ICMP Type
- Select a commonly used Type, such as Echo, from the values defined for ICMP Type
- Click the Add button to add an input value
- When TCP/UDP is selected in the protocol, you can select allowed ports such as SSH, HTTP, TELNET, etc.
- When entering manually, you can input values from 1 to 65535, and you can enter up to 128 entries at once using commas (,) or ranges (-)
- Click the Add button to add an input value
- When Internet Protocol is selected in the type
1 - 254Enter the protocol number within the range
Operation Required Traffic allow/block classification by rule - Allow: Allow traffic when it matches the rule
- Deny: Block traffic when it matches the rule
Direction Essential Firewall standard traffic direction - Inbound: external → internal
- Outbound: internal → external
Active status Required Set rule activation status - If disabled, the rule does not execute
Explanation Selection Additional description written by the user Table. Detailed items of the Firewall rule edit windowWhen the rule information edit is complete, click Confirm in the edit window.
Review the modified rule information and click Done.
6.3 - API Reference
6.4 - CLI Reference
6.5 - Release Note
Firewall
- For user convenience, a Migration Rules page has been added that allows you to import firewall rules created in the V1 environment and apply them to the V2 service.
- The method for entering and modifying/deleting firewall rules has been changed for user convenience. * When managing firewall rules, you can navigate to a separate page to perform the desired actions.
- Add firewall rule input method
- In the KR WEST and KR EAST regions, you can enter the destination address in FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) format.
- Add firewall rule input method
- A feature to input IP protocols has been added.
- Add firewall functionality
- You can use Firewall in the Load Balancer service.
- Samsung Cloud Platform Common Feature Changes
- Account, IAM, Service Home, tags, and other common CX changes have been reflected.
- A feature to save firewall logs has been added.
- You can decide whether to store firewall logs and store the logs in Object Storage.
- Through the Firewall service, you can control inbound and outbound traffic in a VPC.
- The Firewall service has been released.
7 - Direct Connect
7.1 - Overview
Service Overview
Samsung Cloud Platform provides a Direct Connect service that supports safe and fast connections between the customer’s network and the Samsung Cloud Platform environment.
Through Direct Connect, you can allocate the internal private network range of an existing system to Samsung Cloud Platform resources for use. You can deploy backend systems such as application servers in a private network range without internet access, and enhance security by applying Samsung Cloud Platform network services such as Security Groups.
Through Direct Connect, customers can seamlessly migrate their existing systems to Samsung Cloud Platform even if they hard-code IP addresses on devices or have architecture dependencies on IP.
Direct Connect Connection Creation
Supports connecting by selecting a single VPC to connect to the customer network.
Access can be blocked through the Direct Connect Firewall, and a Route configuration feature is provided to ensure a secure connection path.
Constraints
| Category | Default quota | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Direct Connect | 5 | Based on the account, you can create one VPC per service zone (1:1). |
Preceding Service
This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.
| Service Category | Service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Networking | VPC | A service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment |
| Networking | Security Group | Virtual firewall that controls server traffic |
7.1.1 - ServiceWatch Metrics
Direct Connect sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by default monitoring are data collected at 5‑minute intervals.
Basic Metrics
The following are the basic metrics for the Direct Connect namespace.
The indicators whose names are displayed in bold below are the key indicators selected from the basic indicators provided by Direct Connect. Key metrics are used to configure service dashboards that are automatically generated for each service in ServiceWatch.
Each metric indicates through the user guide which statistical value is meaningful when viewing that metric, and among the meaningful statistics, the statistical values shown in bold text are the primary statistics. In the service dashboard, primary metrics can be viewed using the primary statistical values.
| Indicator Name | Detailed description | unit | Meaningful statistics |
|---|---|---|---|
| DirectConnect Network In Bytes | Cumulative traffic volume toward VPC from Direct Connect | Bytes |
|
| DirectConnect Network Out Bytes | Cumulative traffic volume from VPC to Direct Connect | Bytes |
|
| DirectConnect Network In Bytes_Delta | Cumulative traffic volume over 5 minutes from Direct Connect → VPC | Bytes |
|
| DirectConnect Network Out Bytes_Delta | Cumulative traffic volume over 5 minutes from VPC → Direct Connect | Bytes |
|
7.2 - How-to guides
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Direct Connect service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create Direct Connect
You can create and use the Direct Connect service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create Direct Connect, follow these steps.
Click the All Services > Networking > Direct Connect menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Direct Connect.
On the Service Home page, click the Create Direct Connect button. You will be taken to the Create Direct Connect page.
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description Direct Connect name Required A name for Direct Connect that is easy to identify - Enter using English letters (uppercase and lowercase) and numbers, within 3 to 20 characters
Use Uplink Required Bandwidth of the communication port for remote communication - Select port capacity of 1G or 10G
VPC Required Select a VPC for communicating with remote locations Explanation Selection Enter a description of Direct Connect Use firewall Select Select whether to use Direcrt Connect Firewall. Whether to save firewall logs Select Firewall log saving option - Select whether to save firewall logs
- When using the firewall, connection logs are saved
- For more details, refer to Using Firewall Log Saving.
Table. Direct Connect service information input items - In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category Required statusDetailed description Tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 can be added per resource
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
Table. Direct Connect additional information input fields
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Summary Check the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, and click the Complete button.
- Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Direct Connect List page.
Direct Connect View detailed information
The Direct Connect service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information from the Resource Management menu. The Direct Connect Details page consists of Details, Rules, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view the detailed information of Direct Connect, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Direct Connect menu. You will be taken to Direct Connect’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Direct Connect menu. You will be taken to the Direct Connect List page.
- On the Direct Connect List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Direct Connect Details page.
- The Direct Connect Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Rules, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description Status Current status - Active: Operating normally
- Deleting: Deletion in progress
- Creating: Creation in progress
- Failed: Failed
- Error: Unable to determine current status
- If it occurs continuously, contact the registered administrator
Service termination Button to terminate the service - Terminate Direct Connect when there are no linked services
- When terminating a service, the running service may be stopped immediately; therefore, proceed with the termination only after fully considering the impact of service interruption
Table. Direct Connect status information and additional features
- The Direct Connect Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Rules, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
Direct Connect List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and, if needed, modify the information.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Direct Connect resource type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
|
| Resource name | Direct Connect resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in Direct Connect |
| Constructor | User who created Direct Connect |
| Creation timestamp | Direct Connect creation date and time information |
| Editor | User who modified Direct Connect information |
| Modification date and time | Date and time the Direct Connect information was modified |
| Direct Connect name | Direct Connect VPC resource name |
| Using UPlink | Port range allocated for line connection |
| Line request/cancellation SR shortcut | Service for connecting the line in the Samsung Cloud Platform local segment that connects to the customer’s line
|
| Connected VPC name | Name of the VPC connected to Direct Connect |
| Firewall name | Firewall name |
| Use firewall | Firewall usage |
Rule
You can register or modify communication rules between remote sites and the VPC.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Destination IP | Destination IP information |
| Destination | Routing direction |
| Creation timestamp | Creation timestamp information |
| status | Connection status
|
| Delete | You can delete the rule. |
tag
Direct Connect list page allows you to view, add, modify, or delete the tag information of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
On the Direct Connect List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Direct Connect Add Rule
- Click the All Services > Networking > Direct Connect menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of Direct Connect.
- On the Service Home page, click the Direct Connect menu. You will be taken to the Direct Connect List page.
- On the Direct Connect List page, click the resource to which you want to add a rule. You will be taken to that resource’s Direct Connect Details page.
- On the Direct Connect Details page, click the Rules tab.
- Click the Add Rule button in the Rules tab. You will be taken to the Add Rule popup.
- Add Rule Enter the required information in the popup window, and click the Confirm button.
Category Detailed description Destination IP Enter destination IP range - Example:
192.168.25.0/24
Destination Choose between the VPC and the remote location according to the routing direction. Table. Direct Connect rule additional input fields - Example:
Terminate Direct Connect
You can terminate unused VPCs to reduce operating costs. However, terminating a service may cause the running service to stop immediately, so you should thoroughly consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with the termination.
To cancel Direct Connect, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Direct Connect menu. You will be taken to Direct Connect’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Direct Connect menu. You will be taken to the Direct Connect List page.
- On the Direct Connect List page, click the resource to terminate. You will be taken to that resource’s Direct Connect Details page.
- On the Direct Connect Details page, click the Cancel Service button.
- When termination is complete, check on the Direct Connect List page whether the resource has been terminated.
7.3 - API Reference
7.4 - CLI Reference
7.5 - Release Note
Direct Connect
- Samsung Cloud Platform Common Feature Changes
- Account, IAM, Service Home, tags, and other common CX changes have been reflected.
- We are launching the Direct Connect service that quickly and securely connects the customer’s network with the Samsung Cloud Platform network.
8 - Cloud LAN-Campus
8.1 - Overview
Service Overview
Cloud LAN-Campus is a service that provides a user‑authentication‑based wired and wireless integrated network environment within the customer’s premises. By offering simple user/device authentication, it delivers a wired and wireless integrated network access environment for various purposes that can be freely used regardless of location within the premises, based on SDN (Software Defined Network). It minimizes the need for physical network equipment and uses the cloud to easily connect multiple geographically distributed locations. This allows enterprises to reduce the complexity of infrastructure deployment and operation, and to build a flexible and scalable network environment. Additionally, with network and firewall design/configuration optimized for the customer’s environment, professional operating systems, and enhanced security management, the site network can be operated more reliably and efficiently.
Provided features
Cloud LAN-Campus provides the following features.
- Campus Network: Providing wired and wireless network usage environment and integrated authentication services for the site
- NW Access: Infrastructure (AP, NW Switch, etc.) and SDN system services for site network usage
- NW Authentication: User/device authentication-based network segmentation, integrated management of authentication and security policies across multiple sites, support for various authentication methods (AD, certificates, etc.) and policy operation/management through the service portal (user/administrator)
- Campus Firewall: Enterprise firewall design and integrated configuration, operation, and management service provision
Features
- Rapid Business Site Network Work Environment: Provides a unified wired/wireless network usage environment through a user authentication-based SDN (Software Defined Network) solution. IP Mobility and separated networks based on device purpose are applied instantly, and users can easily perform network topology changes via the service portal.
- Network Security Enhancement: By applying logical network segmentation and an authentication-based unified wired/wireless security management system, consistent security policies can be enforced for users and devices. Even when users access the headquarters and multiple sites, the same network access environment and security policies can be applied, and authentication information is securely managed under the Samsung Cloud Platform security framework.
- Multi-Vendor Acceptance and Total Network Service Provision: Performing multi-vendor network integration certification makes the site’s SDN equipment configuration flexible. Additionally, by providing an integrated service framework instead of the customer designing/building/operating/managing the network infrastructure themselves, operational and management efficiency improves. We provide optimized network designs per site and fast, reliable network services through a dedicated team.
- Service-Type Integrated Billing System: The billing system can reduce initial investment costs, and when needed, network infrastructure can be expanded and capacity increased. It provides usage-based authentication services, and no separate operational staff or maintenance contracts are required.
- Various authentication methods and scalability: We provide the optimal authentication solution for customers using various authentication methods. Additionally, we enable functional expansion through integration with client systems (groupware, security systems, etc.) and allow differentiated policy management based on security levels per site.
Component
Cloud LAN-Campus provides services across the entire on‑premises network. The components are listed below, and related services can be created.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Network authentication |
|
| Service portal | Provision of unified wired/wireless authentication service portal
|
| wired/wireless network | Design and integrated configuration/operation/management of SDN-based wired/wireless networks |
| WIPS | Wireless Intrusion Prevention System Configuration/Operation/Management |
| Network solution | Configuration, operation, and management of network solutions such as DHCP and NMS |
| Firewall | Enterprise firewall design and integrated configuration/operation/management |
Constraints
When using the Cloud LAN-Campus service, there are the following limitations.
- To use CLAN authentication, network communication/connection between the customer’s premises and the Samsung Cloud Platform region is required.
- Use Cloud Last Mile, dedicated lines, VPN, etc.
- If the use of a specific vendor’s network or firewall equipment is required, prior consultation is necessary.
- After creating the service to configure equipment within the site, the service’s start and end times are finalized after consulting with the responsible AM.
- When using AD integration for authentication, the authentication-related policy rules must be properly deployed to the user’s PC in advance.
- AD functional issues require oversight by the client’s AD administrator.
- The network segmentation certificate method is supported for the designated OS type (currently limited to Windows), and additional costs apply beyond the certification fee.
Provision status by region
Cloud LAN-Campus can be provided in the environments below.
| Region | Availability |
|---|---|
| Korea West (kr-west1) | Provided |
| South Korea South 1 (kr-south1) | Not provided |
| South Korea South 2 (kr-south2) | Not provided |
| South Korea 3 (kr-south3) | Not provided |
Preceding Service
Cloud LAN-Campus has no prerequisite services.
8.2 - How-to guides
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Cloud LAN-Campus service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create Campus Network
You can create and use the Campus Network service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Campus menu. Navigate to the Cloud LAN-Campus Dashboard page.
- Cloud LAN-Campus Dashboard page, click the Create Campus Network button. You will be taken to the Create Campus Network page.
- On the Campus Network Creation page, after entering the relevant information in the service information input area, click the Complete button.
- Select the service type from NW Access or NW Authentication, and enter the detailed information accordingly.
- NW Access: Select items that require network services, and after creation, the equipment configuration size and monthly service fee are determined through design/consulting.
- NW Authentication: Create an authentication tenant using the generated resource name. Billing is monthly based on usage per tenant, and tenant-specific policy management is available in the CLAN admin portal.
Category Required statusDetailed description Campus Network name Required Enter the Campus Network name to create - Automatic duplicate check is performed, and resources are created with the entered name
- Use English letters, numbers, and special characters (
-_) to input 3-30 characters
Service Category Required Select the type of service to create - Select between NW Access and NW Authentication
Service Category > NW Access Required NW Access Service Creation Item Input - Contract period: Select from 4 to 7 years
- [Wired] NW Access: Select whether to use wired NW
- [Wireless] NW Access: Select whether to use wireless NW
- [Wireless] WIPS usage: Select whether to use wireless WIPS
- Network solution: Select whether to use network solutions such as DHCP
Service Category > NW Authentication Required Select NW network segmentation method - Account/Device: AD integration, network segmentation via account/MAC information, etc.
- Certificate: Network segmentation through certificate binding
Table. Edge Server list items
- Select the service type from NW Access or NW Authentication, and enter the detailed information accordingly.
- After creation is complete, check the created resources on the Campus Network List page.
- When a service is created, the resource status is Request, and the service proceeds under the confirmation of the responsible Samsung SDS AM.
- After creating the service, you can contact the Samsung SDS account manager for progress updates and related inquiries.guide
- When the Cloud LAN-Campus service creation is complete, a customer representative will contact you separately for site consulting and architecture optimization design.
- After completing the consultation with the customer’s representative, network equipment installation work for actual service use within the site proceeds, and service provision begins according to the agreed schedule.
Campus Network Check detailed information
The Cloud LAN-Campus service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. Cloud LAN-Campus Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed information about Cloud LAN-Campus, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Campus menu. Navigate to the Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Campus Network menu. You will be taken to the Campus Network List page.
- On the Campus Network List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Campus Network Details page.
- Campus Network Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Category Detailed description Service status Service status: Billing is monthly, starting at the Active month and ending at the Deleted month - Request: Service creation status
- Creating: Workplace equipment installation and authentication system setup in progress
- Active: Service in progress
- Deleting: Service termination request status
- Deleted: Service termination completed (removed from resource list)
Service termination Cancel Service button Table. Cloud LAN-Campus status information and additional functions
- Campus Network Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Detailed Information
Campus Network List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information when necessary.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Service’s unique resource ID |
| Constructor | User who created the service |
| Creation date and time | Service creation date and time |
| Contract period | Service contract period
|
| Service start date | Service start date |
| Contract expiration date | Service contract expiration date |
| Explanation | Additional description written by the user |
| Service Category | Created service classification information (NW Access / NW Authentication) |
| NW Access | Managed Service Managed Service Information |
| NW Access > [Wired] NW Access | Use wired network service |
| NW Access > [Wired] L2 Quantity | Number of wired Access switches in service |
| NW Access > [Wireless] NW Access | Wireless network service usage |
| NW Access > [Wireless] WIPS | Use of wireless WIPS service |
| NW Access > [Wireless] AP/Sensor quantity | Number of wireless AP/Sensor in service |
| NW Access > Network Solution | Network solution usage |
| NW Access > Network Solution Details | Details of the NW solution in service |
| NW Authentication | CLAN authentication tenant name CLAN authentication CLAN authentication tenant name
|
| NW Authentication >Network Segmentation Status | Number of logically separated network domains, network domain types |
| NW Authentication > Current Month Usage Status | Current month’s CLAN authentication and other authentication usage status |
tag
On the Campus Network List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the Campus Network List page.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Terminate Campus Network
You can reduce operating costs by terminating the unused service.
To cancel the Campus Network, follow the steps below. To cancel the Cloud Network service, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Campus menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Campus Dashboard page.
- On the Cloud LAN-Campus List page, click the resource to terminate. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Campus Details page.
- Cancel Service button, click it.
- After the termination is created, you can contact the Samsung SDS account manager for status updates and related inquiries.
- After the termination is complete, check on the Cloud LAN-Campus list page whether the resource has been terminated.
- If you request termination of the Cloud LAN-Campus service, a customer representative will contact you separately in advance to verify and process the termination.
- The service will be terminated according to the schedule agreed upon with the customer representative.
8.2.1 - Campus Firewall Request Service
In the Samsung Cloud Platform Console, you can request the creation or termination of a Campus Firewall service for a Campus Network.
Request to Create Campus Firewall Service
You can create and use the Campus Firewall service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request the creation of a Campus Firewall service, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Campus menu. Navigate to the Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Campus Firewall Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request page.
- On the Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.guideSelect Campus Firewall Service Creation for the task type.
Input field Detailed description Title Title of the service you want to request Region Select location of Samsung Cloud Platform - Automatically filled with the account’s region
Service Select the service category and service for the target service (auto-select) - Service Category: Networking
- Service: Cloud LAN-Campus
Task classification Select the Activity you want to perform - Campus Firewall Service Creation: select if you are requesting this service
- Campus Firewall Service Termination: select if you are terminating this service
content Enter detailed information required to create a Campus Firewall service - Company/Corporation Name: Required
- Customer Information (Name / E‑Mail / Phone Number): Enter user information
- Content: Required
Attachment If you have additional files you want to share, proceed with the upload - Attachments can be up to 5 files, each within 5 MB
- Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files are allowed
Table. Detailed contents of Campus Firewall service request items - Check the required information entered on the Service Request page, and click the Request button.
- The requested work is expected to take about 5–7 business days.
- Once the service request is completed, a customer representative will contact you separately for site consulting and architecture optimization design.
- After consulting with the customer’s representative is completed, the firewall equipment installation for actual service use within the site proceeds, and service provision begins according to the agreed schedule.
- You can contact the responsible AM at Samsung SDS for progress updates and related inquiries.
Request to cancel Campus Firewall service
You can cancel the Campus Firewall service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Follow these steps to request termination of the Campus Firewall service.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Campus menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Campus Firewall Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request page.
- On the Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.InformationSelect Campus Firewall Service Termination as the task type.
Input field Detailed description Title Title of the service you want to request Region Select location of Samsung Cloud Platform - Automatically filled with the region of the Account
Service Select the service category and service for the given service (auto-select) - Service Category: Networking
- Service: Cloud LAN-Campus
Task classification Select the Activity you want to perform - Create Campus Firewall service: select if you are requesting this service
- Terminate Campus Firewall service: select if you are terminating this service
content Enter detailed information required to cancel the Campus Firewall service - Company/Corporation Name: Required
- Customer Information (Name/ E-Mail/ Phone Number): Enter user information
- Content: Required
Attachment If you have additional files you want to share, proceed with the upload - You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
- Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files can be attached
Table. Detailed contents of Campus Firewall service request items - Verify the required information entered on the Service Request page, then click the Request button.
- The requested work is expected to take about 5–7 business days.
- When the service request is completed, a customer representative will contact you separately to cancel the service.
- You can contact the responsible AM at Samsung SDS for progress updates and related inquiries.
8.3 - Release Note
Cloud LAN Campus
- We have launched the Cloud LAN Campus service, which provides an authentication‑based integrated wired/wireless network service within the customer’s premises.
9 - Cloud LAN-Campus
9.1 - Overview
Service Overview
Cloud LAN-Campus is a service that provides a user authentication‑based integrated wired and wireless network environment within the customer’s premises. It offers a versatile integrated network access environment, based on SDN (Software Defined Network), that can be freely used regardless of location within the site through simple user/device authentication. By minimizing physical network equipment and leveraging the cloud, multiple geographically distributed locations can be easily connected. This allows enterprises to reduce the complexity of infrastructure deployment and operation, and to build a flexible, scalable network environment. Additionally, with network design/configuration optimized for the customer’s environment, professional operational systems, and enhanced security management, the site network can be operated more reliably and efficiently.
Provided features
Cloud LAN-Campus provides the following features.
- Campus Network: Providing wired and wireless network usage environment and integrated authentication services for the site
- NW Access: Infrastructure (AP, NW Switch, etc.) and SDN system services for site network usage
- NW Authentication: User/device authentication-based network segmentation, integrated management of authentication/security policies across multiple sites, support for various authentication methods (AD, certificates, etc.) and policy operation/management through the service portal (user/administrator)
Features
- Rapid Business Site Network Work Environment: Provides a unified wired/wireless network usage environment through a user-authentication-based SDN (Software Defined Network) solution. IP Mobility and device-purpose-based separated networks are applied instantly, and users can easily perform network topology changes via the service portal.
- Network Security Enhancement: By applying logical network segmentation and an authentication-based unified wired/wireless security management system, consistent security policies can be enforced for users and devices. Even when users access the headquarters and multiple sites, the same network access environment and security policies can be applied, and authentication information is securely managed under the Samsung Cloud Platform security framework.
- Multi-Vendor Acceptance and Total Network Service Provision: Performing multi-vendor network integration certification makes the SDN equipment configuration at each site flexible. Additionally, by providing an integrated service framework instead of customers designing/building/operating/managing the network infrastructure themselves, operational and management efficiency improves. We deliver fast and reliable network services with site-optimized network designs and dedicated teams.
- Service-based Integrated Billing System: The billing system can reduce initial investment costs, and when needed, network infrastructure can be expanded and capacity increased. It provides usage-based authentication services, and no separate operational staff or maintenance contracts are required.
- Various authentication methods and scalability: We provide the optimal authentication solution for customers using various authentication methods. Additionally, we enable functional expansion through integration with client systems (groupware, security systems, etc.) and allow differentiated policy management based on security levels per site.
Component
Cloud LAN-Campus provides services across the entire network within the site. The components are as follows, and related services can be created.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Network authentication |
|
| Service portal | Provision of unified wired/wireless authentication service portal
|
| wired/wireless network | Design and integrated configuration, operation, and management of SDN-based wired and wireless networks |
| WIPS | Wireless Intrusion Prevention System Configuration/Operation/Management |
| Network solution | Configuration/operation/management of network solutions such as DHCP, NMS |
Constraints
When using the Cloud LAN-Campus service, there are the following limitations.
- Network communication/connection between the customer’s site and the Samsung Cloud Platform region is required to use CLAN authentication.
- Use Cloud Last Mile, dedicated lines, VPN, etc.
- If you need to use network equipment from a specific vendor, prior consultation is required.
- After creating the service to configure equipment within the site, the start and end times of the service are finalized after consultation with the responsible AM.
- When using AD integration for authentication, the authentication-related policy rules must be properly deployed to the user’s PC in advance.
- Issues with AD functionality require management by the client’s AD administrator.
- The network segmentation certificate method is supported for the designated OS type (currently limited to Windows), and additional costs apply beyond the certification fee.
Provision status by region
Cloud LAN-Campus can be provided in the environments below.
| Region | Provision status |
|---|---|
| Korea West (kr-west1) | Provided |
| South Korea South 1 (kr-south1) | Not provided |
| South Korea South 2 (kr-south2) | Not provided |
| South Korea 3 (kr-south3) | Not provided |
Preceding Service
Cloud LAN-Campus has no prerequisite services.
9.2 - How-to guides
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Cloud LAN-Campus service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Campus Network Service Creation Request
You can create and use the Campus Network service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request the creation of a Campus Network service, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Campus menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Cloud LAN-Campus Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request page.
- On the Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
- In the task type, select Campus Network Service Request.
Input field Detailed description Title Title of the service you want to request Region Select location of Samsung Cloud Platform - Automatically filled with the account’s region
Service Select the service category and service for the given service (auto-select) - Service Category: Networking
- Service: Cloud LAN-Campus
Task classification Select the type you want to perform - Campus Network service request: select if you are requesting a new service
content Enter detailed information required to create a Campus Network service - SCP account name: Enter the account name of Samsung Cloud Platform
- SCP project name: Enter the project name of Samsung Cloud Platform
- Company/Corporation name: Enter the company/corporation name
- Customer information (Name/E-mail/Phone number): Enter user information
- Desired service start date: Enter the service start date
- Network segmentation: Yes / No
- Wired network usage: Yes / No
- Wireless network usage: Yes / No
- Wireless WIPS usage: Yes / No
- Network solution usage (NMS, WAN accelerator, DHCP, etc.): Yes / No
- Estimated contract period: Enter 4 years, 5 years, or 6 years
- Operational service: Yes / No
Attachment If you have additional files you want to share, proceed with the upload - You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
- Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files can be attached
Table. Detailed description of Campus Network service request items
- In the task type, select Campus Network Service Request.
- Verify the required information entered on the Service Request page, then click the Request button.
- After the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
- The requested work takes approximately 5 to 7 business days.
- Once the service request is completed, a customer representative will contact you separately for site consulting and architecture optimization design.
- Ask the Samsung SDS account manager about the progress and service-related matters.
Campus Network Service Cancellation Request
You can cancel the Campus Network service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request termination of the Campus Network service, follow the steps below.
Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Campus menu. Navigate to the Service Home page.
On the Service Home page, click the Cloud LAN-Campus Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request page.
On the Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
- In the task category, select Campus Network Service Termination.
Input field Detailed description Title Title of the service you want to request Region Select location of Samsung Cloud Platform - Automatically filled with the account’s region
service Select the service category and service for the given service (auto-select) - Service Category: Networking
- Service: Cloud LAN-Campus
Task classification Select the type you want to perform - Campus Network service termination: select if you are requesting to terminate the service
content Enter detailed information required for Campus Network service termination - SCP Account Name: Enter the account name of Samsung Cloud Platform
- SCP Project Name: Enter the project name of Samsung Cloud Platform
- Customer Information (Name/Company/Department/E-mail/Phone Number): Enter user information
- Service Termination Request Date: Enter the service termination date
- Details: Enter additional information
Attachment If you have additional files you want to share, proceed with the upload - You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
- Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files can be attached
Table. Detailed description of Campus Network service request items
- In the task category, select Campus Network Service Termination.
Check the required information entered on the Service Request page, and click the Request button.
- When the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
- The requested work takes approximately 5 to 7 business days.
- When the service request is completed, a customer representative will contact you separately to cancel the service.
- Contact the Samsung SDS account manager to inquire about the progress and service-related matters.
9.3 - Release Note
Cloud LAN Campus
- We have launched the Cloud LAN Campus service, which provides an authentication‑based integrated wired/wireless network service within the customer’s premises.
10 - Cloud LAN-Data Center
10.1 - Overview
Service Overview
The Cloud LAN-Data Center can connect various networks such as servers, WAN Edge, and CX (Cloud eXchange) through a shared network infrastructure based on SDDC (Software-Defined Data Center) within a Samsung Cloud Platform region data center or a customer’s on-premises data center.
Features
Cloud LAN-Data Center provides the following features.
- Rapid Network Access: When building a network environment in a Samsung Cloud Platform region or a customer’s on‑premises data center, a fast and secure, enterprise‑customized data center network can be configured using SDDC‑based infrastructure.
- Cost Efficiency: By using logical configurations of virtualized infrastructure and optimized designs by experts, a customer-dedicated network with the same effect as a costly standalone physical network infrastructure can be built. The virtualized network environment reduces costs required for building physical infrastructure such as network equipment, data center floor space, and cabling.
- Operational Continuity Maintenance: We provide a customized operational environment for each company, configured to preserve existing settings such as network security policies, IP schemes, and network protocols required in various on-premises environments.
- Flexible network environment provision: Within an SDDC-based infrastructure, separating edge nodes (external network connection), service nodes (built-in equipment connection), and computing nodes (server connection) enables support for both hardware-type security and network solution appliances that require physical installation in the data center and virtualized equipment.
Provided features
Cloud LAN - Data Center provides the following features.
- Diverse Network Integration Virtualization: Provides virtualized resources for flexible N/W configurations and enables the creation of customer-dedicated networks using various Types of vDevice.
- Network/Security Solution Integration: Provides virtualization solutions in NFV form, and can configure networks by integrating various types of appliances.
Components
Cloud LAN-Data Center is a service that provides connections between various networks through virtual network configurations within a data center. The components are as follows, and related services can be created.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Cloud LAN Network | Virtual space for logically separated network configuration within the Cloud LAN‑Data Center infrastructure |
| vRouter | Virtual resources for connecting external lines (L2, L3) |
| vSwitch | Virtual resources for dedicated customer H/W connections and VLAN provisioning |
| vFirewall | Virtual firewall to protect infrastructure created within the Cloud LAN-Data Center |
| vL4/L7 | Virtual L4/L7 switch for traffic load balancing within the Cloud LAN-Data Center |
| vCore | Virtual resources for Full Mesh routing connections |
| vCable | Virtual Cable for routing connections between virtual resources |
| Interface | Provides a physical interface on the vDevice that can connect hardware equipment and circuits. |
Constraints
When using the Cloud LAN-Data Center service, there are the following limitations.
- Please inquire 1:1 about the available creation capacity per region.
Provision status by region
Cloud LAN-Data Center can be provided in the environments below.
| Region | Provision status |
|---|---|
| Korea West (kr-west1) | Provide |
| South Korea South 1 (kr-south1) | Not provided |
| South Korea South 2 (kr-south2) | Not provided |
| South Korea 3 (kr-south3) | Not provided |
Pre-service
Cloud LAN-Data Center has no prerequisite services.
10.2 - How-to guides
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Cloud LAN Network service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create Cloud LAN Network
You can create and use the Cloud LAN Network service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request the creation of a Cloud LAN Network service, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
- On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Cloud LAN Network Create button. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN Network Create page.
- On the Cloud LAN Network Creation page, enter the required information in the service information input area, and click the Complete button.
- Enter or select the required information in the service information input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description Cloud LAN Network name Required Enter the name of the Cloud LAN Network to create - Enter 3‑21 characters using English letters, numbers, and special characters
Cloud LAN Network location Required Select Cloud LAN Network location description Select Enter additional information or description about the Cloud LAN Network service. Table. Cloud LAN Network service information input items
- Enter or select the required information in the service information input area.
- In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category Required?Detailed description tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 per resource can be added
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key and Value values
Table. Cloud LAN Network additional information input fields
- Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Cloud LAN Network List page.
Check detailed information of Cloud LAN Network
The Cloud LAN Network service allows you to view and edit the list of connected resources and detailed information. Cloud LAN Network Details page consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.
To view detailed information about the Cloud LAN Network, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. Navigate to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
- Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Cloud LAN Network menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN Network list page.
- On the Cloud LAN Network List page, click the resource you want to view detailed information for. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN Network Details page.
- Cloud LAN Network Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and is composed of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description Service status Service status display - Creating: Creating
- Active: Running
- Deleting: Deleting
- Failed: Creation/Deletion failed
Service termination Cancel Service button Table. Cloud LAN Network status information and additional functions
- Cloud LAN Network Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and is composed of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
Cloud LAN Network List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and modify it if necessary.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource Name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Service’s unique resource ID |
| constructor | User who created the service |
| Creation date and time | Service creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who modified the service |
| Modification date and time | Date and time the service was modified |
| Service Information | Created service details
|
Connected resource
On the Cloud LAN Network List page, you can view the vDevice information assigned to the selected resources.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| vDevice List | Display vDevice information and status assigned to the created service |
tag
Cloud LAN Network List page lets you view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
Cloud LAN Network List page allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Terminate Cloud LAN Network
To cancel the Cloud LAN Network, follow these steps.
- If other resources are connected to the Cloud LAN Network, you cannot cancel the service. Delete all connected resources before canceling the service.
- If the Cloud LAN Network service status is Creating or Deleting, the service cannot be terminated.
- If you cancel the Cloud LAN Network service, it will be deleted immediately and cannot be recovered. Since canceling the service may cause the running service to stop immediately, please carefully consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with the cancellation.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
- Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Cloud LAN Network menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN Network list page.
- On the Cloud LAN Network List page, click the resource you want to view detailed information for. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN Network Detail page.
- On the Cloud LAN Network Details page, click the Service Termination button.
- When the termination is complete, check whether the resource has been deleted in the Cloud LAN Network list.
10.2.1 - vDevice
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the vDevice service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create vDevice
You can create and use the vDevice service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
- To request a vDevice, a Cloud LAN Network must be created. * Check the Cloud LAN Network information before applying for a vDevice.
- The detailed configuration of the generated vDevice uses a separate operating platform (NiO). * For NiO-related inquiries, please submit your request through Support Center > Contact and we will provide guidance.
To request the creation of a vDevice service, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
- On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Create vDevice button. 2. Navigate to the vDevice Creation page.
- On the vDevice Creation page, enter the relevant information in the service information input area.
- Enter or select the required information in the service information input area.
Category required statusDetailed description Cloud LAN Network name Required Select the Cloud LAN Network to assign the vDevice vDevice Type Required Select the type of vDevice to create - vRouter: virtual resource for connecting external lines (L2, L3)
- vSwitch: virtual resource for connecting customer-dedicated hardware and providing VLANs
- vFirewall: virtual firewall for protecting infrastructure created within the Data Center
- vCore: inter-resource connection service for Full-Mesh communication between virtual resources
- vL4/L7: virtual L4/L7 switch for traffic load balancing within Cloud LAN-Data Center
- vTAP : virtual resource for replicating traffic within Cloud LAN-Data Center and sending it to other devices
vDevice Type > vRouter Required Enter the name to create when selecting vRouter - Enter using letters, numbers, and special characters, 3-21 characters long
vDevice Type > vSwitch Required Enter the name to create when selecting a vSwitch - Use English letters, numbers, and special characters, 3-21 characters
vDevice Type > vFirewall Required Select creation information when choosing vFirewall - vFirewall: Enter the name to create
- Vendor: Select vendor
- Type: Choose the plan of the selected vendor
- Redundancy: Choose whether to use redundancy, when Enabled is selected the cost for two firewalls is charged, and when not selected a single configuration is applied
- Log storage option: Choose whether to use log storage, logs are stored on a single server and even if redundancy is selected only one server’s fee is charged
- Contract period: Select contract period
vDevice Type > vCore Required Enter the name to create when selecting vCore - Enter using letters, numbers, and special characters, 3 to 21 characters
vDevice Type > vL4/L7 Required Select creation information when choosing vL4/L7 - vL4/L7 name: Enter the name to create
- Unit: Enter the number of units to use (1-20)
- Redundancy: Choose whether to use firewall redundancy
- Contract period: Select the contract period
vDevice Type > vTAP Required Select creation information when choosing vTAP - vTAP name: Enter the name to create
- Redundancy: Choose whether to use vTAP redundancy
- Contract period: Select contract period
Table. vDevice service information input itemsReferenceWhen applying for a vFirewall, a Firewall Interface is created automatically. Detailed firewall information by vendor is as follows.
vendor Firewall type Interface count Generated vFirewall Interface SECUI 6 Gbs, 5,000 Rules 3 int / ext / dmz.1 SECUI 12 Gbs, 15,000 Rules 3 int / ext / dmz.1 SECUI 30 Gbs, 30,000 Rules 4 int / ext / dmz.1 / dmz.2 SECUI 60 Gbs, 100,000 Rules 5 int / ext / dmz.1 / dmz.2 / dmz.3 Fortinet 1 Gbs, 1,000 Rules 3 int / ext / dmz.1 Table. Detailed Firewall information by vendor - In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category required statusDetailed description Tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 can be added per resource
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
Table. vDevice additional information entry fields
- Enter or select the required information in the service information input area.
- Summary Check the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, and click the Complete button.
- When creation is complete, check the created resources on the vDevice List page.
Check vDevice detailed information
The vDevice service allows you to view and edit the list of connected resources and their detailed information. The vDevice Details page consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.
To view detailed information about the vDevice, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. 1. Navigate to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
- From the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the vDevice menu. 2. Navigate to the vDevice List page.
- vDevice List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 4. Go to the vDevice Details page.
- vDevice Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description Service status Service status display - Creating: Creating
- Active: Running
- Deleting: Deleting
- Failed: Creation/Deletion failed
Delete vDevice Delete Service button Table. vDevice status information and additional functions
- vDevice Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
On the vDevice List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and, if necessary, edit the information.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Service’s unique resource ID |
| Constructor | User who created the service |
| Creation date and time | Service creation date and time |
| Editor | User who modified the service |
| Modification date | Date and time of service modification |
| Service Information | Created service details
|
Connected resource
On the vDevice List page, you can view the resources allocated to the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| List of connected resources | Display detailed information and status of resources allocated to the created service
|
Tag
On the vDevice list page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the vDevice list page.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Terminate vDevice
To terminate the vDevice, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. 1. Navigate to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
- On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the vDevice menu. 2. Navigate to the vDevice List page.
- On the vDevice List page, click the resource to view its detailed information. 4. Navigate to the vDevice Details page.
- On the vDevice Detail page, click the vDevice Delete button.
- After termination is complete, check whether the resource has been deleted from the vDevice list.
10.2.2 - Interface
Users can create the Interface service by entering its required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create Interface
You can create and use an Interface service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
- To request an Interface, a Cloud LAN Network and vDevice must be created. Before requesting an Interface, verify the Cloud LAN Network and vDevice information.
- Interface is a function that assigns a physical port to a pre‑created vDevice. Interface can only be requested for vRouter and vSwitch.
- When a vFirewall is created, interfaces are automatically generated to match the quantity specified for each spec.
To request the creation of an Interface service, follow these steps.
Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
From the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Create Interface button. You will be taken to the Create Interface page.
On the Interface creation page, enter the relevant information in the service information input area.
- Enter or select the required information in the service information input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description Cloud LAN Network name Required Select the Cloud LAN Network to assign to the Interface vDevice Type Required Select the type of vDevice to use - vRouter: virtual resource for connecting external lines (L2, L3)
- vSwitch: virtual resource for connecting customer-dedicated hardware and providing VLANs
vDevice Type Details Required Select detailed information for vDevice type - vDevice Name: Select a vDevice
- Interface Type: Select the type of Interface to use
- Interface Name: Enter the Interface name
- You can add up to 5 Interface entries; press the (+) button to add an entry, and the (x) button to delete an entry
- Interface Redundancy: Set whether Interface redundancy is enabled; selecting redundancy incurs charges for two ports
- Contract Period: Select the desired contract period
Table. Interface service information input fields - In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category Required statusDetailed description Tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 can be added per resource
- Add Tag button after clicking, input or select Key, Value values
Table. Interface additional information input fields
- Enter or select the required information in the service information input area.
Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Complete button.
- Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Interface List page.
Check interface detailed information
The Interface service allows you to view and edit the list of connected resources and detailed information. Interface Details page consists of Detailed Information, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed information about the Interface, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. Go to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
- On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Interface menu. You will be taken to the Interface List page.
- Click the resource to view detailed information on the Interface List page. You will be taken to the Interface Details page.
- Interface Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Category Detailed description Service status Service status display - Creating: In progress
- Active: Running
- Deleting: In progress
- Failed: Creation/Deletion failed
Delete Interface Delete Service button Table. Interface status information and additional functions
- Interface Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Detailed Information
Interface list page allows you to view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Service’s unique resource ID |
| constructor | User who created the service |
| Creation Timestamp | Service creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who modified the service |
| Modification date and time | Date and time the service was modified |
| vDevice Type | vDevice Type information |
| vDevice name | vDevice name |
| Interface Type | Interface Type information |
| Port redundancy | Whether to use port redundancy |
| Contract period | Selected contract term |
tag
On the Interface list page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
On the Interface list page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Terminate Interface
To cancel the Interface, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
- On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Interface menu. You will be taken to the Interface List page.
- On the Interface List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Interface Details page.
- On the Interface Details page, click the Delete Interface button.
- When the termination is complete, check whether the resource has been deleted in the Interface list.
10.2.3 - vCable
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the vCable service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create vCable
You can create and use the vCable service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
- To request a vCable, a Cloud LAN Network and a vDevice must be created. Before requesting a vCable, verify the Cloud LAN Network and vDevice information.
- Only vCable configurations between vDevices created in the same Cloud LAN Network are possible.
To request the creation of a vCable service, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
- On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the Create vCable button. You will be taken to the Create vCable page.
- On the vCable Creation page, enter the relevant information in the service information input area.
- Enter or select the required information in the service information input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description Cloud LAN Network name Required Select the Cloud LAN Network to assign the vCable. vCable Type Required Select the type of vCable to create - Static: Provides a 1:1 connection between vDevices; when configuring vDevice A and vDevice B, select different virtual resources
- vCore: Provides Multi Peering between vDevices, connecting multiple vDevices to enable connections between vDevices
vCable Type > Details Required Enter detailed information according to vCable Type - vCable Name: Enter the name of the vCable to create
- vDevice A: Select vDevice A
- vDevice B: Select vDevice B
- Select vDevice A and B sequentially; if a vFirewall Interface is selected from the A list, it will not appear in the B list
- When the vCable Type is Static, vCore cannot be selected on vDevice A or vDevice B
- When the vCable Type is vCore, vCore can be selected only on vDevice A
- A vDevice can be connected to only one vCable
- A vFirewall can connect a vCable using a vFirewall Interface
Table. vCable Service Information Input Items - In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category required or notDetailed description tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 can be added per resource
- Add Tag After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
Table. vCable additional information input fields
- Enter or select the required information in the service information input area.
- Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Complete button.
- When creation is complete, check the created resources on the vCable List page.
Check vCable detailed information
The vCable service allows you to view and edit the list of connected resources and detailed information. vCable Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed vCable information, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
- On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the vCable menu. You will be taken to the vCable List page.
- Click the resource to view detailed information on the vCable List page. You will be taken to the vCable Detail page.
- vCable Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Work History tabs.
Category Detailed description Service status Service status display - Creating: Creating
- Active: Running
- Deleting: Deleting
- Failed: Creation/Deletion failed
Delete vCable Delete Service button Table. vCable status information and additional functions
- vCable Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Work History tabs.
Detailed Information
On the vCable List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | Resource name |
| Resource ID | Service’s unique resource ID |
| constructor | User who created the service |
| Creation date and time | Service creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who modified the service |
| Modification date and time | Date and time the service was modified |
| vDevice Type | vDevice Type categories |
| vDevice A name | vDevice A name |
| vDevice B name | vDevice B name |
tag
On the vCable List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the vCable List page.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Terminate vCable
To cancel vCable, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
- On the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page, click the vCable menu. You will be taken to the vCable List page.
- On the vCable List page, click the resource to view its details. You will be taken to the vCable Details page.
- On the vCable Details page, click the Delete vCable button.
- After termination is complete, verify that the resource has been deleted from the vCable list.
10.2.4 - vEdge
Users can apply for the service by entering the required information for using the vEdge service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create vEdge
You can request and use the vEdge service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request the creation of a vEdge service, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud LAN-Data Center menu. You will be taken to the Cloud LAN-Data Center Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the vEdge Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.
- On the Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
- In the task category, select vEdge creation.
Input field Detailed description Title Enter the title of the service request - Example: vEdge Service Creation Request
Region Select the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform - Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
service Select the service category and service. If you click the vEdge service request button, it is entered automatically - Service Category: Networking
- Service: vEdge
Task classification Select the type you want to request - Create vEdge: select when requesting a new service
content Guidance on the service application process and reference information Attachment If you have a file you want to share via the repository, proceed with the upload - You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
- Only files with the following extensions are allowed: doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif
Table. vEdge Service Creation Request Items
- In the task category, select vEdge creation.
- Check the required information entered on the Service Request page, and click the Request button.
- When the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
Check vEdge application details
You can view the vEdge service subscription and cancellation history in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To check the vEdge service application details, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. Go to the Support Center > Service Home page.
- On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request menu. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.
- On the Service Request List page, click the Title of the service request you submitted. You will be taken to the Service Request Details page.
- On the Service Request Details page, view the request status and information.
Terminate vEdge
To request cancellation of the vEdge service, follow the steps below.
Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Home page.
On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.
On the Service Request List page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request page.
Service Request page: enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
- Select vEdge termination in the task category.
Input field Detailed description Title Enter the title of the service request - Example: vEdge Service Termination Request
Region Select the location of Samsung Cloud Platform - Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
Service Select service category and service - Service Category: Networking
- Service: vEdge
Task classification Select the type of request you want to make - vEdge termination: select if you are terminating the service
content Guide to the service application process and reference information Attachment If you have additional files you want to share, proceed with the upload - You can attach up to 5 files, each within 5 MB
- Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files can be attached
Table. vEdge Service Termination Request Items
- Select vEdge termination in the task category.
Check the required information entered on the Service Request page, and click the Request button.
- When the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
- Service termination takes 5–7 business days, including the cancellation request date.
10.3 - Release Note
Cloud LAN-Data Center
- The services provided in specific Samsung offering regions (kr-west1/kr-east1) have changed.
- The vTAP option has been added to the Cloud LAN - Data Center service in Samsung’s offering.
- Samsung Cloud Platform Common Feature Changes
- Account, IAM, Service Home, tags, and other common CX changes have been reflected.
- We have launched the Cloud LAN-Data Center service, which provides connections between various networks through virtual network configurations within the data center.
11 - Cloud WAN
11.1 - Overview
Service Overview
Cloud WAN is a service that provides network connectivity between Samsung Cloud Platform global regions and customer locations. This offering is based on network traffic usage and provides differentiated operational management services according to the selected service level.
The Cloud WAN service consists of the customer virtual backbone Cloud WAN Network, the Segment that provides logical network segmentation by purpose, and the Attachment that connects Samsung Cloud Platform Compute resources or receives a dedicated line from the customer’s site and connects it to a Segment.
For example, to configure a backbone network connection from a system in a Samsung Cloud Platform region to a customer’s overseas location, the following settings are required in the user console. First, create the customer’s virtual backbone Cloud WAN Network. Next, select the access location, service level, contract period, and other options to create a segment that fits the intended use. Then, by attaching the segment at the region or the customer’s location, the backbone network between the SCP region and the customer locations is connected, enabling communication between them.
Service Architecture Diagram
Provided features
Cloud WAN provides the following features.
- Rapid Backbone Network Configuration: Customers using Samsung Cloud Platform can select desired site locations, create a virtual global backbone network, and configure a fast and secure cloud network between Samsung Cloud Platform regions and customer sites, as well as among customer sites.
- Providing Various Network Edge Connection Types: By offering various Edge types that can connect to Cloud WAN, Samsung Cloud Platform Compute resources can be conveniently connected via Transit Gateway, and customers’ on‑premise local lines can be connected via Site Connect.
- Cost Optimization Through Multi-Path Selection Feature: Unlike traditional backbone network line services based on line bandwidth, we charge only for the actual usage in the desired segment, and provide a transmission path option (Gold/Silver) selection feature based on traffic characteristics, enabling line cost optimization.
- Service Level-Based Operations Management: Customers can choose the utilization mode of the Cloud WAN backbone transport network, the provided features, monitoring, fault management, and technical support level, and receive differentiated network operations management services according to the selected service level.
Component
The Cloud WAN service provides a global customer virtual backbone network. The components are as follows, and users can create resources directly through the user Console.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Cloud WAN Network | Customer-specific virtual backbone network |
| Segment | Logical virtual routing domains in Cloud WAN Network, categorized by usage
|
| Access Location | Physical base location for constructing a Segment |
| Attachment | Connect Samsung Cloud Platform or the customer’s dedicated line Edge resources |
| Transit Gateway | Edge connection type for connecting Samsung Cloud Platform Compute resources |
| Site Connect | Edge connection type for connecting customer site dedicated line resources (CE equipment) |
| CE equipment | Network equipment that receives the dedicated line at the customer’s site (Customer Edge) |
| Segment Sharing | Provides routing exchange settings to enable mutual communication among resources connected to different segments. |
Constraints
The Cloud WAN service has the following limitations.
- You can create one Cloud WAN Network per account.
- You can create up to five Segments in a single Cloud WAN Network.
- You can create up to 50 Attachments in a single Segment.
- You can create up to 10 Segment Sharings for a single Segment.
- Connections between Segment and Attachment are allowed only within the same project, through request and approval.
- However, Segment Sharing can be linked across different projects through request and approval.
Provision status by region
The Cloud WAN service is available in the environments below.
| Region | Provision status |
|---|---|
| Korea West 1 (kr-west1) | Provided |
| Korea East 1 (kr-east1) | Not provided |
| South Korea South 1 (kr-south1) | Not provided |
| South Korea South 2 (kr-south2) | Not provided |
| Korea South 3(kr-south3) | Not provided |
Preliminary Service
This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.
| Service Category | Service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Networking | Transit Gateway | A service that securely and quickly connects Compute resources within the Samsung Cloud Platform to a Cloud WAN Segment. |
11.1.1 - Monitoring Metrics
According to Samsung Cloud Platform’s policy, the Cloud Monitoring service is scheduled to be discontinued in September 2026.
Accordingly, after the September 2026 release, resource monitoring of the Samsung Cloud Platform via Cloud Monitoring will no longer be possible.
With the new alternative service, you can continuously conduct resource monitoring by using ServiceWatch, released in October 2025.
ServiceWatch provides more modern and powerful features, replacing Cloud Monitoring to deliver a smooth monitoring environment.
Block Storage is planned to be integrated with ServiceWatch starting after the September 2026 release.
Detailed information about ServiceWatch can be found in the ServiceWatch Overview.
Cloud WAN monitoring metrics
The table below shows the monitoring metrics for Cloud WAN that can be viewed in Cloud Monitoring. For detailed usage of Cloud Monitoring, see the Cloud Monitoring guide.
| Performance items | Detailed description | unit |
|---|---|---|
| Instance Status | Attachment connection status | status |
| Network in bytes | In bytes (inbound traffic usage per interval) | bytes |
| Network In Error Packets | In Error Packet count (number of received error packets per cycle) | Cnt |
| Network In Packets [Broadcast] | In Broadcast Packet count (number of Broadcast packets per cycle) | Cnt |
| Network In Packets [Dropped] | In Dropped Packet count (number of dropped packets per cycle) | Cnt |
| Network In Packets [Multicast] | In Multicast Packet count (number of Multicast packets per cycle) | Cnt |
| Network In Packets [Unicast] | In Unicast Packet count (number of Unicast packets per cycle) | Cnt |
| Network out bytes | Out bytes(Outbound traffic usage per interval) | bytes |
| Network Out Error Packets | Out Error Packet count (number of transmission error packets per cycle) | Cnt |
| Network Out Packets [Broadcast] | Out Broadcast Packet count (number of Broadcast packets per cycle) | Cnt |
| Network Out Packets [Dropped] | Out Dropped Packet count (number of dropped packets per cycle) | Cnt |
| Network Out Packets [Multicast] | Out Multicast Packet count (number of Multicast packets per cycle) | Cnt |
| Network Out Packets [Unicast] | Out Unicast Packet count (Unicast packet count per cycle) | Cnt |
11.2 - How-to guides
Users can enter the required Cloud WAN information and select detailed options to create a service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create Cloud WAN Network
You can create and use a Cloud WAN Network in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create a Cloud WAN Network, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
- On the Service Home page, click the Create Cloud WAN Network button. 2. Go to the Create Cloud WAN Network page.
- On the Create Cloud WAN Network page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category required statusDetailed description Cloud WAN Network name Required Enter the name of the Cloud WAN Network to create - Enter using English letters (uppercase and lowercase) and numbers, 3 to 20 characters
Table. Cloud WAN Network Service Information Input Items - Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category required statusDetailed description Explanation Select Enter resource description tag Select Add tag - Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
Table. Cloud WAN Network additional information entry items
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
- In the summary panel, review the service information and estimated charges, then click the Create button.
- Once creation is complete, check the created resources on the Cloud WAN Network List page.
Check detailed information of Cloud WAN Network
The Cloud WAN Network service can view and edit the full resource list and detailed information from the Cloud WAN Network menu. Cloud WAN Network Details page is composed of the Detail Information, Connected Resources, Tags, and Operation History tabs.
To view detailed information about the Cloud WAN Network, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
- On the Service Home page, click the Cloud WAN Network menu. 2. Go to the Cloud WAN Network List page.
- Cloud WAN Network List page, click the resource for which you want to view detailed information. 3. Cloud WAN Network Details Navigate to the page.
- Cloud WAN Network Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description status Current service status - Creating: Service creation in progress
- Active: Service operating normally
- Deleting: Service deletion in progress
- Failed: Service failed
- Error: Service status cannot be determined
Service termination Service termination button - If there are no connected services, the Cloud WAN Network can be terminated
Table. Cloud WAN Network status information and additional feature items
- Cloud WAN Network Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
Detailed Information tab allows you to view the detailed information of the selected Cloud WAN Network.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type (Cloud WAN Network) |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Constructor | Service creation request user |
| Creation date and time | Service creation date and time |
| Modifier | Service modification request user |
| Modification timestamp | Service modification date and time |
| Cloud WAN Network name | Cloud WAN Network name |
| Segment count | Number of used segments |
| Explanation | Description of the service
|
Connected resource
In the Connected Resources tab, you can view Segment connection status information.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Segment name | Segment resource name |
| Segment ID | Segment ID information |
| status | Service resource status information |
Tag
In the Tag tab, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
In the Work History tab, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Terminate Cloud WAN Network
Terminating an unused Cloud WAN Network can reduce operating costs.
- If there are resources connected to the Cloud WAN Network, the service cannot be terminated. * Delete the connected resources first, then terminate the service.
- If the service status of Cloud WAN Network is Creating or Deleting, the service cannot be terminated.
To cancel the Cloud WAN Network, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
- On the Service Home page, click the Cloud WAN Network menu. 2. Cloud WAN Network List Navigate to the page.
- On the Cloud WAN Network List page, click the resource to terminate. 3. Cloud WAN Network Details Navigate to the page.
- Cloud WAN Network Details on the page, click the Cancel Service button.
- After termination is complete, check the resource termination status in the Cloud WAN Network list.
Create Segment
You can create a Segment in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and use it.
To create a Segment, follow these steps.
All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
From the Service Home page’s drop-down, click the Create Segment button. 2. Navigate to the Create Segment page.
Segment creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category required statusDetailed description Cloud WAN Network name Required Select Cloud WAN Network - Click +Create New to create a Cloud WAN Network and then select it
Segment name Selection After entering the Segment name, click the Duplicate Check button Access Location Required Select the location to connect the Segment - Only one Access Location can be selected
- Detailed Information > Connected Resources tab allows adding Access Locations one at a time
- Access Locations can be added up to the number of Cloud WAN service deployment locations
Service type Required Select Segment service type - Select usage region (global)
- * Global is for connecting domestic and overseas regions
- Select service level (PremiumPlusG)
- * Dedicated TAM assignment, advanced technical support service provided
- Select contract term (none, 3 years, 5 years, 7 years)
- * Contract discount rate automatically applied based on term
Multiple paths Selection Multi-path transmission selection (available after July 2026) - Default path: Gold (3-way architecture, critical tasks)
- Optional path : Silver (2-way architecture, standard)
Table. Segment service information entry fields - In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category required statusDetailed description Explanation Selection Enter description for Segment tag Selection Add tags - Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
Table. Segment additional information input fields
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
In the summary panel, check the service information and estimated charges, and click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, check the created resources on the Segment list page.
After creating the Segment, set the following in the Details > Connected Resources tab.
- Link the attachment created in the same account to the segment.
- To connect between different accounts, configure Segment Sharing.
Check segment detailed information
You can view and edit Segment in the Segment menu, where you can see the full resource list and detailed information. The Segment Details page consists of the Details, Connected Resources, Multi-Path, Tags, Activity History tabs.
To view the detailed information of the Segment, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
- On the Service Home page, click the Segment menu. 2. Navigate to the Segment list page.
- On the Segment List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Segment Details page.
- Segment Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connected Resources, Multi-Path, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description status Current service status - Creating: Service is being created
- Active: Service is operating normally
- Deleting: Service deletion requested
- Failed: Service creation failed
- Error: An unknown error occurred in the service
Delete Segment Segment delete button - If there is no connected service, the Segment can be deleted
Table. Segment status information and additional feature items
- Segment Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connected Resources, Multi-Path, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
Detailed Information tab allows you to view detailed information of the selected Segment.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type (Segment) |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | Resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Constructor | Service creation request user |
| Creation date and time | Service creation date and time |
| Modifier | Service modification request user |
| Modification date | Service modification date and time |
| Segment name | Segment name |
| Access Location count | Number of access locations (Access Location) connected to the segment |
| Regional classification | Select usage region (global, domestic)
|
| Service level | Select provided service level (PremiumPlusG, LIteG)
|
| Contract period | Service usage commitment period
|
| Attachment count | Number of Attachments linked to Segment |
| Multiple paths | Select the transmission path option (Gold/Silver) used by Segment
|
| Explanation | Description of the Segment
|
Connected resource
In the Connected Resources tab, you can check the connection status information for Access Location, Segment Sharing, and Attachment.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Access Location | Check the location information linked to the Segment
|
| Segment Sharing | To connect between different projects, you can request a Segment Sharing connection
|
| Attachment connection | In Segment, you can request to connect an Attachment created in the same project
|
Multiple Paths
In the Multi-Path tab, you can add or remove optional path rules for multi-path.
Add Multi-Path Rule
To add a multi-path rule, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu, click. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
- On the Service Home page, click the Segment menu. 2. Segment list Go to the page.
- Segment List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Segment Details page.
- On the Segment Details page, click the Multiple Paths tab.
- Click the Add Rule button on the Multi-Path tab page. 5. The add rule popup appears.
- Enter the detailed information in the popup window and click Confirm.
Category required statusDetailed description Departure Access Location Essential Select the source location information of the multipath rule Source IP range Essential Enter the source IP range - When entering an IP address, register the IP range in CIDR format (e.g., 192.168.10.0/24)
Destination IP range Essential Enter destination IP range - When entering an IP address, register the IP range in CIDR format (e.g., 192.168.10.0/24)
- Cannot set both source IP range and destination IP range to 0.0.0.0/0
protocol Selection Select protocol Port direction Selection Select the port direction for the chosen protocol Port number Select If TCP or UDP protocol is selected, enter the port number - Allowed range: 1 - 65,535
- Port numbers can be entered up to a maximum of 5, separated by commas (e.g., 80, 443)
Explanation Selection Enter multiple path rule description Table. Multiple path rule addition input items
- If you enter information identical to an already registered rule, you cannot register it as a new multi‑path rule.
- You can apply for up to 20 multi-path rules.
Checking Multiple Path Rules
To verify the multi-path rule, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
- On the Service Home page, click the Segment menu. 2. Go to the Segment list page.
- Segment List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Segment Details page.
- Segment Details on the page, click the Multiple Paths tab.
- Multi-Path tab page, view detailed information.
Category Detailed description Departure Access Location Source location information of the multi‑path rule Source IP range Source IP range Destination IP range Destination IP range protocol Protocol information Port direction Protocol port direction Port number Port numbers of TCP and UDP protocols Explanation Explanation of multi-path rule Table. Multi-path rule detailed information items
If you click the Detailed Search button on the right side of the rule list, you can set search filters and perform a search.
- You can quickly view multiple rules by searching with the desired filter among Source Access Location, Source IP, Destination IP, and Description.
Delete Multi-Path Rule
To delete a multi-path rule, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu, click. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
- On the Service Home page, click the Segment menu. 2. Segment list Go to the page.
- Segment List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Go to the Segment Details page.
- On the Segment Details page, click the Multiple Paths tab.
- On the Multi-path tab page, click the Delete button. 5. The rule will be deleted.
Tag
In the Tag tab, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
Job History tab allows you to view the job history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource change history
|
Delete Segment
Deleting unused Segments can reduce operating costs.
- You cannot delete it if there is an attachment connected to the segment, or if segment sharing or multiple path rules exist. * Delete the connected resources first, then terminate the service.
- If the service status of a Segment is Creating, Deleting, Inactive, or Failed, the service cannot be deleted.
To delete a Segment, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu, click it. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
- On the Service Home page, click the Segment menu. 2. Go to the Segment list page.
- Segment list page, click the resource you want to delete. 3. Go to the Segment Details page.
- On the Segment Details page, click the Delete Segment button.
- After deletion is complete, check the resource deletion status in the Segment list.
Create Attachment
You can create and use the Attachment service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create an Attachment, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
- From the Service Home page dropdown, click the Create Attachment button. 2. Navigate to the Create Attachment page.
- On the Attachment creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category required statusDetailed description Cloud WAN Network name Required Select the Cloud WAN Network to request the Attachment - Click +New creation to create a Cloud WAN Network and then select it
Segment name Select Select the Segment to attach the Attachment - +Create New when clicked, a Segment is created and selected
Access Location Required Select the location connected to the Segment Connection type Required Site Connect Detailed connection information settings - Attachment name: Enter attachment name
- ASN information: Enter ASN information within the range 1-65,534. Note that 65,001 cannot be used
- Port capacity: Select port capacity
- BGP Password: Enter the password to be used for BGP (Border Gateway Protocol) when configuring BGP routing with the customer’s Customer Edge equipment
- When establishing a Site Connect connection, additional CE router and SR tasks are performed, taking several days until final connection
Connection type Required Select a connectable Transit Gateway (available after March 2027) - When selecting an Access Location with Multi-AZ enabled, only Transit Gateway can be set in the connection type
- Only Transit Gateway items within the same project are displayed
- TGW items that already have a TGW Peering connection or an Attachment connection are not shown in the list
- When a TGW item is selected, the Attachment name is generated automatically
Table. Attachment service information input fields - Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category required statusDetailed description Explanation Select Enter description for Attachment tag Select Add tags - Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
Table. Attachment additional information input fields
- In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
- In the summary panel, verify the service information and estimated charges, then click the Create button.
- After creation is complete, check the created resources on the Attachment List page.
Check attachment details
Attachment can be viewed and edited in the Attachment menu, where you can see the full resource list and detailed information. The Attachment Details page consists of the Details, Tags, and Work History tabs.
To view the detailed information of the Attachment, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
- On the Service Home page, click the Attachment menu. 2. Go to the Attachment List page.
- On the Attachment list page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Navigate to the Attachment Details page.
- Attachment Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and is composed of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description status Current service status - Creating: Creating service
- Active: Service operating normally
- Requesting: Service request in progress, Attachment request can be canceled
- Deleting: Service deletion request in progress
- Failed: Service creation failed
- Error: An unknown error occurred in the service
Delete Attachment Attachment Delete Button Table. Attachment status information and additional feature items
- Attachment Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and is composed of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
Detailed Information tab allows you to view the detailed information of the selected Attachment.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource type (Attachment) |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Constructor | Service creation request user |
| Creation date and time | Service creation date and time |
| Modifier | Service modification request user |
| Modification date | Service modification date and time |
| Attachment name | Attachment name |
| Segment name | Name of the Segment linked to the Attachment |
| Access Location | Attachment connection point (Access Location) |
| Connection type | Attachment connection type (Site Connect or Transit Gateway) |
| ASN information | When selecting Site Connect, the AS Number entered directly by the user
|
| Port capacity | Port capacity configured when selecting Site Connect |
| BGP Password | The BGP password entered when selecting Site Connect
|
| Explanation | Description of the attachment
|
tag
In the Tag tab, you can view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
Job History tab allows you to view the job history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource change history
|
Delete Attachment
Deleting unused Attachment can reduce operating costs.
To delete the attachment, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > Cloud WAN Click the menu. 1. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud WAN.
- On the Service Home page, click the Attachment menu. 2. Go to the Attachment list page.
- Attachment List page, click the resource you want to delete. 3. Navigate to the Attachment Details page.
- On the Attachment Details page, click the Attachment Delete button.
- After deletion is complete, check the resource deletion status in the Attachment list.
11.3 - Release Note
Cloud WAN
- Cloud WAN > Attachment > Site Connect When you select this type, the BGP Password configuration feature is added when setting up BGP routing with the customer’s Customer Edge equipment.
- Samsung Cloud Platform has launched the Cloud WAN service that provides network connectivity between global regions and customer sites.
12 - SASE
12.1 - Overview
Service Overview
SASE is a service that integrates network and security functions on a cloud basis, allowing users to securely access corporate assets and applications from anywhere. It routes traffic via optimal paths and provides consistent security services for both internal and external environments through SASE points of presence located in Samsung Cloud Platform global regions.
Features
- Global SASE Fabric: We continuously expand service coverage upon customer demand by linking SASE hubs that utilize the systematic Samsung SDS Global network infrastructure with vPOPs prepared across all regions.
- All in One Security: It covers a security layer that includes advanced SSL/TLS analysis, sophisticated application awareness/policy, and AI/ML‑based real‑time behavior analysis within a single solution, optimizing operational complexity and performance.
- Network/Security Unification: By delivering network and security integrated on a single operating system based on a unified architecture, traffic is processed swiftly.
- End to End Full Managed: Provide the required infrastructure for connecting customer sites as a packaged solution under a single contract, and deliver comprehensive operational services ranging from monitoring to incident notification and reporting.
Service Architecture Diagram
- SASE hub: Configure a gateway and control unit in Samsung SDS Global POP and CSP vPOP to provide network connectivity and security functions
- SASE circuit: Physical circuit connecting the customer site and the SASE hub, configured as an SD‑WAN or VPN over internet/MPLS/dedicated line
- SASE Edge: Customer edge device for connecting to the SASE circuit, using a router/SD‑WAN device/VPN device on‑premises and a PC/mobile or similar customer‑owned endpoint device off‑premises.
Provided features
The SASE service provides the following features.
- WAN Edge Network
- Provide intra- and inter-region communication between various edge devices (SD-WAN devices, routers, VPN devices, PC, Mobile, etc.)
- Providing optimal application-specific routes using SD-WAN
- Provides traffic control (QoS) and TCP acceleration capabilities for high-quality networks.
- SSE(Secure Service Edge) security
- ZTNA: Provide least privilege, security, and private connections for internal applications
- SWG: Provides gateway security to protect internal users from insecure traffic such as that on the Internet.
- CASB: Provides the ability to apply corporate security policies between users and cloud applications.
- FWaaS : Provides inspection and control of all service traffic through a cloud-based firewall
- RBI, DLP, SANDBOX, etc. provide additional advanced security features
- Unified Orchestrator and DEM(Digital Experience Monitoring)
- Integrated network and security management for cloud, on-premises, and edge devices
- Monitoring of user experience (identifying issues such as network performance degradation, app interruptions, and determining their causes)
Constraints
The constraints of the SASE service are as follows.
- Service is unavailable in the China region, but will be offered in the future.
Provision status by region
SASE is available in the environments below.
| Region | Provision status |
|---|---|
| Korea West (kr-west1) | Provided |
| Korea East (kr-east1) | Not provided |
| South Korea 1 (kr-south1) | Not provided |
| South Korea South 2 (kr-south2) | Not provided |
| South Korea 3 (kr-south3) | Not provided |
Prior Service
SASE has no preceding service.
12.2 - How-to guides
Users can create the SASE service by entering the required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create SASE
You can create and use SASE services in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request the creation of a SASE service, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > SASE menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of SASE.
- On the Service Home page, click the Create SASE button. You will be taken to the Create SASE page.
- On the SASE creation page, enter the information required to create the service.
- Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description SASE name Required SASE name to be used by the user - Enter using letters and numbers, 3-20 characters
Service level Required Select SASE service level Service Type Required Select SASE service type - Agent type: Enter the number of agents to use in increments of 10, within 1-10,000
- Edge type: Choose whether to enable inter‑region connections, and select the upstream country and connection bandwidth for the site
- Click ‘+’ to add up to 10 items, click ‘X’ to delete an item
Contract period Required Select SASE contract period Other requests option Enter request details when applying for SASE service Table. SASE Service Information Input Items
- Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
- Check the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the summary panel, and click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Resource List page.
Check SASE detailed information
The SASE service can view and edit the full resource list and detailed information from the SASE menu. The SASE Details page consists of Details, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed information about SASE, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > SASE menu. Navigate to SASE’s Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the SASE menu. You will be taken to the SASE List page.
- On the SASE List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the SASE Details page.
- SASE Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detailed Information, Work History tabs.
Category Detailed description status Current service status - Request: Service request in progress
- Creating: Service registration completed
- Active: Service approved and successfully created
- Deleting: Service termination request in progress
Previous state change Previous state change button - In Creating, Active, Deleting states, it is possible to change to the previous state
Service termination Cancel Service button Table. SASE status information and additional feature items
- SASE Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Detailed Information, Work History tabs.
Detailed Information
Detailed Information tab lets you view the detailed information of the selected SASE.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type (SASE) |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | Resource name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Constructor | User requesting service creation |
| Creation date and time | Service creation date and time |
| Editor | User requesting service modification |
| Modification date | Service modification date/time |
| Service Details | SASE service selection items
|
| Service level | SASE service level
|
| Contract period | SASE Service Commitment Period |
| Other requests | SASE service request
|
Job History
Work History tab allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Terminate SASE
If you cancel unused SASE, you can reduce operating costs.
To cancel SASE, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > SASE menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of SASE.
- On the Service Home page, click the SASE menu. You will be taken to the SASE List page.
- SASE List page, click the resource to cancel. You will be taken to the SASE Details page.
- On the SASE Details page, click the Service Termination button.
- When the termination is complete, check the resource termination status in the SASE list.
12.2.1 - SASE Lastmile
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the SASE Lastmile service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create SASE Lastmile
You can create and use the SASE Lastmile service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request the creation of a SASE Lastmile service, follow these steps.
Click the All Services > Networking > SASE menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of SASE.
On the Service Home page, click the SASE Lastmile Create button. It navigates to the SASE Lastmile Create page.
On the SASE Lastmile Creation page, enter the information required to create the service.
- Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description SASE name Required Select the SASE service to use - Click + New Creation to create a SASE service and then select it
Site Required Select detailed items for the SASE site to use - Site name: Select the site to use
- Connection bandwidth, Parent country: Automatically fill in selected SASE information
- Circuit: Apply then select circuit1, circuit2
- Customer Edge: Apply then select Customer Edge1, Customer Edge2
Table. SASE Lastmile Service Information Input Items
- Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Verify the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the summary panel, and click the Create button.
- After creation is complete, check the created resource on the Resource List page.
Check detailed information of SASE Lastmile
The SASE Lastmile service can view and edit the full resource list and detailed information from the SASE Lastmile menu. The SASE Lastmile Details page consists of Detail Information, Task History tabs.
To view detailed information about SASE Lastmile, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > SASE menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of SASE.
- On the Service Home page, click the SASE Lastmile menu. You will be taken to the SASE Lastmile List page.
- SASE Lastmile List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the SASE Lastmile Details page.
- SASE Lastmile Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Work History tabs.
Category Detailed description status Current service status - Request: Service request in progress
- Creating: Service request completed
- Active: Service approved and successfully created
- Deleting: Service termination request in progress
Previous state change Previous state change button - In Creating, Active, Deleting states, it is possible to revert to the previous state
Delete SASE Lastmile Cancel Service button Table. SASE Lastmile status information and additional feature items
- SASE Lastmile Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Work History tabs.
Detailed Information
Detailed Information tab allows you to view detailed information of the selected SASE Lastmile.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type (SASE Lastmile) |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Constructor | Service creation request user |
| Creation date and time | Service creation date and time |
| Editor | Service modification request user |
| Modification date | Service modification date and time |
| Site | Site configuration information
|
Job History
Work History tab allows you to view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Terminate SASE Lastmile
If you cancel the unused SASE Lastmile, you can reduce operating costs.
To cancel SASE Lastmile, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > SASE menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of SASE.
- On the Service Home page, click the SASE Lastmile menu. You will be taken to the SASE Lastmile List page.
- SASE Lastmile List page, click the resource to cancel. You will be taken to the SASE Lastmile Details page.
- On the SASE Lastmile Details page, click the SASE Lastmile Delete button.
- When the termination is complete, check the resource termination status in the SASE Lastmile list.
12.3 - Release Note
SASE
- The automatic ledger creation feature via the Samsung Cloud Platform user console has been added.
- We have launched a SASE service that combines networking and security functions into a single cloud-based platform.
13 - Cloud Last Mile
13.1 - Overview
Service Overview
Cloud Last Mile is a service that provides Last Mile circuits for network connectivity from the customer’s site to the Samsung Cloud Platform region, as well as Customer Edge resources within the customer’s site. Resources installed and operated at the customer’s site can be easily requested through a service request in the Samsung Cloud Platform user console.
Features
- Provision of Circuits and Edge Packages: We provide Last Mile circuits and Edge resources for connecting the customer’s site to external networks as a package, combining optimal equipment that matches the application types the customer primarily uses.
- Various Edge Connection Types Provided: You can select virtual resources or physical equipment types, and choose from various functions needed for network connections such as routers, SD-WAN, WAN accelerators, firewalls, etc.
- Provision of Last Mile line monitoring service: Samsung Cloud Platform region’s network equipment-connected Last Mile line connection status and traffic usage information can be conveniently checked using the monitoring service. The monitoring service is provided using NiO, Samsung SDS’s proprietary platform.
Service Architecture Diagram
Provided features
The Cloud Last Mile service provides the following features.
- Last Mile line
- Line provision type: dedicated line or internet
- Upstream connection type: Cloud LAN - Data Center, On-Premise equipment in Samsung SDS data center
- Customer Edge Resource Provisioning Type
- uCPE(VNF: Virtual Network Function): router, SD-WAN, WAN accelerator, firewall
- Physical equipment: SD-WAN
- Last Mile line monitoring service
- Monitoring Last Mile line up/down status and traffic usage
Constraints
The constraints of the Cloud Last Mile service are as follows.
- Since it is offered only as a package of the line and Edge equipment, the line or equipment cannot be provided separately.
- Depending on the upstream country’s connection method, it may be necessary to set up customer-dedicated equipment within the Samsung Cloud Platform region.
- When connecting to shared equipment in a higher-tier country, port fees may be charged depending on the associated product.
Provision status by region
Cloud Last Mile is available in the environments below.
| Region | Provision status |
|---|---|
| Korea West (kr-west1) | Provide |
| Korea East (kr-east1) | Not provided |
| South Korea South 1 (kr-south1) | Not provided |
| South Korea South 2 (kr-south2) | Not provided |
| South Korea 3 (kr-south3) | Not provided |
Prior Service
Cloud Last Mile has no prior service.
13.2 - How-to guides
Users can create the Cloud Last Mile service by entering the required information and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create Cloud Last Mile
You can create and use the Cloud Last Mile service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request the creation of a Cloud Last Mile service, follow these steps.
Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud Last Mile menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of Cloud Last Mile.
Click the Create Cloud Last Mile button on the Service Home page. You will be taken to the Create Cloud Last Mile page.
Enter the information required to create the service on the Cloud Last Mile Creation page.
- Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description Cloud Last Mile name Required Enter the Cloud Last Mile name the user will use - using English letters and numbers, 3-20 characters
Installation area Required Select installation region for Cloud Last Mile Installation address Required Enter Cloud Last Mile installation address Contract period Required Select contract period for Cloud Last Mile service Installation request date Required Select Cloud Last Mile installation request date - Select a date at least two months after today in the calendar
Other requests Option Enter request details when applying for Cloud Last Mile service Table. Cloud Last Mile service information entry items
- Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Check the detailed information created in the summary panel and click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Resource List page.
Check detailed information of Cloud Last Mile
The Cloud Last Mile service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information from the Cloud Last Mile menu. The Cloud Last Mile Details page consists of Details, Connected Resources, and Task History tabs.
To view detailed information about Cloud Last Mile, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud Last Mile menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of Cloud Last Mile.
- From the Service Home page, click the Cloud Last Mile menu. You will be taken to the Cloud Last Mile List page.
- Cloud Last Mile List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Cloud Last Mile Detail page.
- Cloud Last Mile Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connected Resources, Operation History tabs.
Category Detailed description status Current service status - Request: Service request in progress
- Creating: Service registration completed
- Active: Service approved and successfully created
Service termination Cancel Service button Table. Cloud Last Mile status information and additional feature items
- Cloud Last Mile Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Connected Resources, Operation History tabs.
Detailed Information
In the Detailed Information tab, you can view the detailed information of the selected Cloud Last Mile.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type (Cloud Last Mile) |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Constructor | User requesting service creation |
| Creation date and time | Service creation date and time |
| Editor | Service modification request user |
| Modification date and time | Service modification date and time |
| Service Details | Service detailed configuration information
|
Connected resources
In the Connected Resources tab, you can view the Circuit and Edge information linked to the selected Cloud Last Mile.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Circuit and Edge ID | Circuit and Edge ID Information
|
| Resource type | Circuit and Edge resource type |
| Connection type | Circuit and Edge connection type |
| Resource Details | Circuit and Edge resource detailed configuration information |
Job History
In the Work History tab, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Terminate Cloud Last Mile
If you cancel the unused Cloud Last Mile, you can reduce operating costs.
To cancel Cloud Last Mile, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud Last Mile menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of Cloud Last Mile.
- On the Service Home page, click the Cloud Last Mile menu. You will be taken to the Cloud Last Mile list page.
- On the Cloud Last Mile List page, click the resource to be terminated. Proceed to the Cloud Last Mile Details page.
- Click the Cancel Service button on the Cloud Last Mile Details page.
- After termination is complete, check the resource termination status in the Cloud Last Mile list.
13.2.1 - Circuit and Edge
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Circuit and Edge service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create Circuit and Edge
You can create and use the Circuit and Edge service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request the creation of a Circuit and Edge service, follow the steps below.
Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud Last Mile menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Last Mile.
On the Service Home page, click the Create Circuit and Edge button. You will be taken to the Create Circuit and Edge page.
On the Circuit and Edge Creation page, enter the information required to create a service.
- Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category RequiredDetailed description Cloud Last Mile name Required Select the Cloud Last Mile service to use - + New click to create a Cloud Last Mile service and then select it
Resource type Required Select resource type to use Resource Type > Circuit Required Select the connection type of the circuit - SD-WAN: Select the license to use
- VPN: Choose the line type and enter the line bandwidth
- Enter the line bandwidth within 1-1,000
Resource Type > Customer Edge Required Select usage type for Customer Edge - Physical equipment: Select the manufacturer and performance of the physical equipment to use
- Virtual resources: Enter the Customer Edge name and select the type
- Select cCPE specifications
- Select use with up to three VNF functions, and choose the manufacturer and performance for each item
Table. Input fields for Circuit and Edge service information
- Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Check the detailed information generated in the summary panel, and click the Create button.
- After creation is complete, check the created resource on the Resource List page.
Check detailed information for Circuit and Edge
The Circuit and Edge service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information from the Circuit and Edge menu. The Circuit and Edge Details page consists of Details, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed information of Circuit and Edge, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud Last Mile menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of Cloud Last Mile.
- On the Service Home page, click the Circuit and Edge menu. You will be taken to the Circuit and Edge list page.
- Circuit and Edge List Click the resource to view detailed information on the page. Circuit and Edge Details page will be opened.
- Circuit and Edge Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Activity Log tabs.
Category Detailed description status Current service status - Request: Service request in progress
- Creating: Service registration completed
- Active: Service approved and successfully created
- Deleting: Service termination request in progress
Previous state change Previous state change button - In Creating, Active, Deleting states, you can revert to the previous state
Delete Circuit and Edge Cancel Service button Table. Circuit and Edge status information and additional feature items
- Circuit and Edge Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Activity Log tabs.
Detailed Information
Detailed Information tab allows you to view the detailed information of the selected Circuit and Edge.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type (Circuit and Edge) |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Constructor | User requesting service creation |
| Creation date and time | Service creation date and time |
| Editor | User requesting service modification |
| Modification date and time | Service modification date and time |
| Service Details | Service detailed configuration information
|
Job History
In the Work History tab, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Terminate Circuit and Edge
If you cancel unused Circuit and Edge, you can reduce operating costs.
To cancel Circuit and Edge, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud Last Mile menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of Cloud Last Mile.
- On the Service Home page, click the Circuit and Edge menu. You will be taken to the Circuit and Edge list page.
- On the Circuit and Edge List page, click the resource to cancel. You will be taken to the Circuit and Edge Details page.
- Circuit and Edge Details page, click the Circuit and Edge Delete button.
- When termination is complete, check the resource termination status in the Circuit and Edge list.
13.3 - Release Note
Cloud Last Mile
- The automatic ledger creation feature via the Samsung Cloud Platform user console has been added.
- We have launched the Cloud Last Mile service, which provides a Last Mile line for network connectivity from the customer’s site to the Samsung Cloud Platform region and Customer Edge resources within the customer’s site.
14 - Global CDN
14.1 - Overview
Service Overview
Global CDN is a service that delivers static content stored on web servers or object storage to users more quickly and securely through numerous edge servers distributed across a global network. It distributes the load of the origin server during traffic spikes to protect the origin server, and by downloading content from nearby edge servers, it can provide users with fast and reliable web services.
Features
- Easy CDN Service Use: Through the web-based console of Samsung Cloud Platform, you can conveniently request Global CDN services. You can easily configure Samsung Cloud Platform’s origin server settings and the caching policy of Global CDN edge servers, enabling rapid content delivery service usage.
- Service Availability Improvement: Even when many users request content simultaneously, generating excessive traffic, users can access content quickly without any degradation in usability thanks to edge servers distributed across multiple locations. Therefore, when used for tasks that require reliable global services, it ensures service availability.
- Secure Content Usage: Supports HTTP, HTTPS, and HTTP/2 protocols, enabling content integration with various origin servers. When the cached content’s validity period expires or a validation check confirms changes to the origin content, the edge server’s existing cache is removed. Subsequently, when a user requests content, the new content from the origin server is cached, ensuring the user always receives valid, up-to-date content.
- Efficient Cost Management: Even in work environments that require large-scale traffic, such as downloading massive files, stable service is possible without extensive resource usage. Additionally, Global CDN usage fees are charged only based on content consumption, enabling efficient cost management.
Service Architecture Diagram
Provided features
The Global CDN service provides the following features.
- Original Settings: Set the location and path of the origin server, and by providing built‑in compression for origin content, reduce traffic and improve response speed.
- Caching Settings: Set the cached content delivery policy and cache expiration time, and when the content’s validity period expires (TTL expiration), you can delete (Purge) the expired cached content on the edge server.
- Content Protection: By communicating with the origin server via the HTTPS protocol, the security of the content delivery path is strengthened, and the powerful security features of the Global CDN network can protect content and users from DDoS attacks and web‑based attacks.
Component
Connection between the origin and the global CDN network
| Category | Explanation |
|---|---|
| Original location and path configuration | Based on the main name or IP address, set the origin server’s location, protocol, port number, and file path to connect the origin to the Global CDN network |
| Forward host header | Configure the Host header value that the Global CDN forwards to the user when requesting the origin server. |
| Cache key hostname | Configure cache key information to identify content on the Global CDN Edge server |
| Custom header(request) | Set whether to use custom header |
Caching in a Global CDN Network
| Category | description |
|---|---|
| Caching options | Configuring caching options on a global CDN network using the origin server’s Cache-Control and expiration times |
| Content Delivery Policy | Setting a transmission policy based on validity after TTL expiration |
| Cache expiration time | Set expiration time for cached content |
| Detailed policy | Configure usage of Ignore query string, Range request, Custom header |
Constraints
The constraints of the Global CDN service are as follows.
| Category | description |
|---|---|
| Maximum number of domains that can be created per account | 20 |
Provision status by region
Global CDN is available in the environments listed below.
| Region | Provision status |
|---|---|
| Korea West (kr-west1) | Provided |
| Korea East (kr-east1) | Provided |
| South Korea South 1 (kr-south1) | Not provided |
| South Korea 2 (kr-south2) | Not provided |
| South Korea 3 (kr-south3) | Not provided |
Prior Service
The Global CDN service has no prerequisite services.
14.1.1 - ServiceWatch Metrics
Global CDN sends metrics to ServiceWatch. The metrics provided by default monitoring are data collected at 5‑minute intervals.
Basic Metrics
The following are the basic metrics for the Global CDN namespace.
The indicators whose names are displayed in bold below are the key indicators selected from the basic metrics provided by Global CDN. Key metrics are used to configure service dashboards that are automatically built for each service in ServiceWatch.
Each metric provides guidance in the user guide on which statistical value is meaningful when viewing that metric, and among the meaningful statistics, the values displayed in bold text are the primary statistics. In the service dashboard, primary metrics can be viewed using the primary statistical values.
| Performance items | Detailed description | unit | Meaningful statistics |
|---|---|---|---|
| cdn.data.transmitted.bytes.total | Data transferred via the CDN service | Bytes |
|
| cdn.requests.hits.total | Number of service requests received through the CDN service | Count |
|
14.2 - How-to guides
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Global CDN service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create Global CDN
You can create and use the Global CDN service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request the creation of a Global CDN service, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Global CDN menu. Go to the Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Global CDN Create button. You will be taken to the Global CDN Create page.
- On the Global CDN Creation page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description CDN name Required Enter the Global CDN name to use - Cannot use the same name as an existing one
CDN domain Required Enter the domain name of the Global CDN to use Table. Global CDN Service Information Input Items - Enter or select the required information in the Original Settings area.
Category RequiredDetailed description Original location > domain or IP Required Enter the origin server location - Enter the domain name (recommended) or the origin server’s public IP directly
Source location > Protocol Required Select protocol to use - The service protocol and the source protocol must be set identically
Original location > Port number Required Enter one source port to use - Allowed source ports: 72, 80-89, 443, 488, 591, 777, 1080, 1088, 1111, 1443, 2080, 7001, 7070, 7612, 7777, 8000-9001, 9090, 9901-9908, 11080-11110, 12900-12949, 45002
Original path Select Enter the directory path of the original file - Example: /aaa/bbb/ccc/
Forward host header Required Set the Host header value delivered to the user when requesting the origin server from the Global CDN - Incoming host header: service domain name
- Origin host name: origin domain name
- Custom Value: Enter the domain name directly in the standard domain format, such as www.abc.com
Cache key hostname Required Configure cache key information to identify content on the Global CDN Edge server - Incoming host header: Use the domain the user accesses as the cache key
- Origin hostname: Use the configured origin domain as the cache key
Custom header (request) Selection When the Global CDN Edge server requests the origin server, change a specific Header - Select Use to enter Header name and Header value
- Add items with the (+) button and delete with the (X) button
- Up to 10 entries can be entered
Table. Global CDN origin configuration input fieldsReference- You can request multiple Global CDN services from a single Account.
- In the Global CDN service, only one origin location can be set.
- Enter or select the required information in the Caching Settings area. Decide how to handle the Cache header delivered to the Global CDN Edge server.
Category RequiredDetailed description Caching options Required Set the caching policy applied to all content delivered to the Global CDN Edge server (recommended: Honor origin cache-control and expires) - Honor origin cache-control and expires: Follows both the origin’s cache-control and expiration policies
- Cache: Follows the Global CDN provider’s policy
- Honor origin expires: Follows the origin’s expiration time policy
- Honor origin cache-control: Follows the origin server’s cache control policy
Content Delivery Policy Required Validate content authenticity with the origin server from the Global CDN Edge server - Provide only valid content: Configure not to send when TTL expires (recommended)
- Provide all cached content: Provide all cached content regardless of TTL expiration
Cache expiration time Required Enter the expiration time for cached content on the Global CDN Edge - Enter a value between 3,600 – 2,592,000 seconds
Ignore query string Selection Set whether to use the query string when applying the caching policy - Use setting ignores the query sting
Allow range request Selection Provides large file optimization for objects larger than 100 MB - Use when enabled, supports optimization up to 1.8 GB
Custom header (response) Select Change a specific Header when requesting the origin server from the Global CDN Edge server - using setting, enter Header name and Header value
- (+) button to add items, and (X) button to delete
- Up to 10 entries can be entered
Table. Global CDN caching configuration input fields - In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category RequiredDetailed description tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 can be added per resource
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
Table. Global CDN additional information input fields
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
- Check the application details and click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Global CDN List page.
Check Global CDN detailed information
The Global CDN service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. Global CDN Detail page consists of Detailed Information, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed information about the Global CDN, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Global CDN menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Global CDN.
- On the Service Home page, click the Global CDN menu. You will be taken to the Global CDN List page.
- On the Global CDN List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Global CDN Details page.
- Global CDN Details page displays the status and detailed information of Global CDN, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Category Detailed description Service status Status of Global CDN - Creating: Creating / when Global CDN starts
- Active: Creation complete / operating, information can be modified
- Inactive/Pending: Operation stopped
- Aborted: Failed to activate after Property creation
- Stopped/stopping: Operation halted / halting
- Editing: Changing settings
- Starting: Starting
- Deleting: Terminating
- Mismatching: When the version of the Console and the Global CDN partner differ
- Error: Error occurred
Start Start Service button Stop Stop Service button Apply Purge Apply Purger feature button Service termination Button to cancel Global CDN Table. Global CDN status information and additional features
- Global CDN Details page displays the status and detailed information of Global CDN, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
Detailed Information
Global CDN List page allows you to view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| Constructor | User who created the service |
| Creation date and time | Service creation timestamp |
| Editor | User who edited the service information |
| Modification date | Date and time the service information was modified |
| CDN name | CDN name |
| CDN domain | CDN domain information |
| CDN configuration version | Configuration (Property) information applied to the Global CDN service
|
| description | Additional description entered by the user
|
| Original settings | Entered CDN origin information
|
| Caching Settings | Entered CDN description
|
tag
Global CDN List page lets you view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
On the Global CDN List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Change Global CDN Settings
You can change and apply the Global CDN service settings.
To change the Global CDN settings, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Global CDN menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Global CDN.
- On the Service Home page, click the Global CDN menu. You will be taken to the Global CDN List page.
- On the Global CDN List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Global CDN Details page.
- On the Global CDN Details page, click the Edit button. You will be taken to the Global CDN Edit page.
- Global CDN Edit page, modify the desired information and click Done. An edit notification window will appear.
- Click Confirm in the alert dialog. The service information update is complete.
Control Global CDN Operation
You can stop or restart the Global CDN service.
To control the operation of the Global CDN, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Global CDN menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Global CDN.
- On the Service Home page, click the Global CDN menu. You will be taken to the Global CDN List page.
- On the Global CDN List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Global CDN Details page.
- On the Global CDN Details page, click the control button. It controls the service operation.
- Start: Run the Global CDN service.
- Stop: Stops the operation of the Global CDN service.
- Starting or stopping the service takes more than an hour to propagate worldwide.
- If you stop the service, the provision of the service domain will be discontinued. Be careful when using the service stop function.
Applying Global CDN Purge
Purge is a feature that forcibly deletes content cached on CDN Edge servers. If the content is modified before the object expires, you can use Purge to delete the existing content on the CDN Edge and then configure it to be refreshed with the new content.
- When a purge is applied, all content stored on the CDN edge is deleted, which may cause simultaneous content requests from the CDN edge to the origin.
- Executing a purge can increase requests to the origin server, potentially causing load. Exercise caution when applying a purge.
To apply a purge to the Global CDN, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Global CDN menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Global CDN.
- On the Service Home page, click the Global CDN menu. You will be taken to the Global CDN List page.
- On the Global CDN List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Global CDN Details page.
- On the Global CDN Details page, click the Apply Purge button. The Apply Purge window opens.
- In the Purge settings window, configure the detailed items and click OK. An edit notification window will open.
- Content Selection: Select the type of content to which Purge will be applied.
- Path Information Input: When Full Domain is selected, the configured domain information is displayed, and when Path Input is selected, you can directly enter the path excluding the domain.
- Click OK in the alert dialog. The purge will be applied.
Terminate Global CDN
You can request termination of the Global CDN service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request termination of the Global CDN service, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Global CDN menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Global CDN.
- On the Service Home page, click the Global CDN menu. You will be taken to the Global CDN List page.
- On the Global CDN List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Global CDN Details page.
- On the Global CDN Details page, click the Cancel Service button.
- After the termination is complete, check the service termination status in the Global CDN list.
14.3 - API Reference
14.4 - CLI Reference
14.5 - Release Note
Global CDN
- By integrating with Service Watch, you can view measurement values for the following two items.
- Check Global CDN status
- Check Global CDN processed data volume
- Data from 30 minutes ago is displayed due to the processing time of external CDN network traffic.
- We have launched a Global CDN service that delivers static content stored on web servers or object storage to users more quickly and securely via edge servers distributed across the global network.
15 - GSLB
15.1 - Overview
Service Overview
GSLB (Global Server Load Balancing) automatically distributes network traffic to an available adjacent region based on DNS when traffic increases in a specific global area. When a specific server fails, we load‑balance network traffic to an available new resource to ensure the service continues reliably.
Features
- Stable Service Provision: By using the health check function (Health Check) that verifies the normal operation of connected resources, if a failure occurs on a specific server, the resource is immediately Fail over and removed from domain responses, redirecting traffic to other resources to provide stable service.
- Easy Service Port Configuration: Through the web-based console, you can conveniently create GSLB and set/manage service ports. For L4-level load balancing, multiple ports can be configured (e.g., 80, 443, 8080-8090), and you can apply and manage several load balancing rules simultaneously.
- Efficient Cost Management: Because the billing method is granularly applied so that fees are determined based on the number of configured domains, the number of added Health Check resources, and the number of queries, costs can be managed efficiently.
Service Architecture Diagram
Provided features
The GSLB service provides the following features.
- GSLB Creation/Management: You can register multiple resources to a single GSLB.
- Load Balancing Algorithm Selection: Provides the Ratio method, which distributes traffic proportionally to the weight (Weight) of each connection target, and the Round Robin method, which cycles traffic and distributes it evenly.
- Health Check Settings: check interval (Interval), service down detection time (Timeout), response wait time (Probe Timeout), protocols (ICMP, TCP, HTTP, HTTPS), and service ports can be configured.
Constraints
The limitations of the GSLB service are as follows.
| Category | Explanation |
|---|---|
| Maximum number of domains that can be created per account | 20 |
| Maximum number of connectable resources per domain | 8 |
- For GSLB to monitor the target, an allow rule must be added to the target resource’s firewall and security group.
Provision status by region
The GSLB service is available in the environments below.
| Region | Provision status |
|---|---|
| Korea West (kr-west1) | Provide |
| Korea East (kr-east1) | Provided |
| South Korea South 1 (kr-south1) | Not provided |
| South Korea 2 (kr-south2) | Not provided |
| South Korea South 3 (kr-south3) | Not provided |
Preliminary Service
The GSLB service has no prerequisite services.
15.2 - How-to guides
Users can create the service by entering the required information for the GSLB service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create GSLB
You can create and use a GSLB service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request the creation of a GSLB service, follow these steps.
- All Services > Networking > GSLB Click the menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Create GSLB button. You will be taken to the Create GSLB page.
- On the GSLB Creation page, enter the information required to create a service and select detailed options.
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
Category Required statusDetailed description Purpose Required Automatically input PUBLIC when creating GSLB domain name Required Enter the GSLB domain name to use - Enter using lowercase English letters and numbers, between 4 and 40 characters
- Cannot use the same name as an existing one
Add connection target > IP Required Enter the target IP address Add connection target > Location Required Select the location to perform monitoring for the connection target - It is recommended to specify a location close to the IP server
Add connection target > Description Select Enter additional information or description about the connection target Add connection target > Connection target list Required Display added target IP, location, and description entries - Enter target IP, location, and description, then click the Add button to add the entry
- Up to 8 target connections can be added to a single GSLB service
- Click x to remove an entry from the list, click the Delete All button to remove all entries from the list
Table. GSLB Service Information Input Items - Enter or select the required information in the Connection Target Monitoring Settings area.
Category RequiredDetailed description Health Check Required Select the protocol type for health check - ICMP, TCP, HTTP, HTTPS can be selected (recommended to use HTTPS for security)
Interval Required Enter the time interval (seconds) for performing health checks. Timeout Required Enter the waiting time (seconds) to determine the server’s status (UP or DOWN) during a health check. Probe Timeout Required Enter the response timeout (seconds) - Enter the domain name (recommended) or the origin server’s public IP directly
Service Port Required When using TCP/HTTP/HTTPS protocols, enter the port to be used for health checks - Enter the domain name (recommended) or directly input the origin server’s public IP
User Name Select Enter the username to use when authentication is required for health check communication when using the HTTP/HTTPS protocol. Password Select Enter the password to use when authentication is required for health check communication while using the HTTP/HTTPS protocol - Include English letters, numbers, and special characters (@$!%*#?&) and enter it within 8 - 20 characters
Send String Selection When using the HTTP/HTTPS protocol, enter the string to be sent when checking a specific web page - Example) GET /www/example/index.html
- For HTTP 1.0/1.1, use /r/n for line breaks, and special characters (<, >, #) cannot be used in the string
Receive String Required When using the HTTP/HTTPS protocol, enter the string to be received as a health‑check response - The string must contain only English letters (uppercase and lowercase) and numbers
Table. GSLB connection target monitoring configuration input items - Enter or select the required information in the Load Balancing Policy Settings area.
Category Required statusDetailed description Algorithm Required Select load balancing method - Ratio: Distribute traffic proportionally to the weight (Weight) of each connection target
- Round robin: Distribute traffic evenly based on a round-robin method
Connection target Required Enter Weight for each target when selecting Ratio - Weight is the weighting applied to each target when distributing service requests; enter a value between 0 and 100.
- Click the detail view icon of the description item to view target information
Table. GSLB load balancing policy input items - In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
Category RequiredDetailed description Explanation Selection Enter additional information or description about the GSLB service. tag Select Add Tag - Up to 50 per resource can be added
- After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
Table. GSLB additional information input fields
- Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
- Check the creation history and click the Create button.
- When creation is complete, check the created resource on the GSLB List page.
Check GSLB detailed information
The GSLB service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. GSLB Details page consists of Details, Targets, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
To view detailed GSLB information, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > GSLB menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of GSLB.
- On the Service Home page, click the GSLB menu. You will be taken to the GSLB List page.
- On the GSLB List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the GSLB Details page.
- The GSLB Details page displays the GSLB’s status and detailed information, and consists of the Details, Targets, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Category Detailed description Service status GSLB status - Creating: In progress
- Active: Running
- Editing: In progress
- Deleting: In progress
- Error: An error occurred
Service termination Button to cancel GSLB Table. GSLB status information and additional features
- The GSLB Details page displays the GSLB’s status and detailed information, and consists of the Details, Targets, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
Detailed Information
On the GSLB List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and, if necessary, edit the information.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Service | Service name |
| Resource Type | Resource Type |
| SRN | Unique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Resource Name | Resource Name |
| Resource ID | Unique resource ID in the service |
| constructor | User who created the service |
| Creation date and time | Service creation date and time |
| Editor | User who edited the service information |
| Modification date | Date and time the service information was modified |
| Domain name | GSLB domain information |
| Purpose | GSLB usage |
| Algorithm | Configured GSLB algorithm information
|
| Health Check | Configured GSLB health check information
|
| Explanation | Entered GSLB description
|
Connection target
On the GSLB List page, you can view the connection target information of the selected resource and, if necessary, edit the information.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| IP | Destination IP address |
| Resource ID | GSLB Resource ID |
| Location | Location to perform monitoring of the connection target |
| description | Enter additional information or description for the connection target
|
| Whether to use | Indicate whether the connection target is used |
| Weight | Display the weight of the connection target |
| Connection status | Connection status display
|
| Edit connection target | Add or modify connection target
|
tag
On the GSLB List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Tag list | Tag list
|
Job History
On the GSLB List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.
| Category | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Task History List | Resource Change History
|
Modify connection target information
You can add, modify, or delete GSLB connection target information.
To change the GSLB connection target information, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > GSLB menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of GSLB.
- On the Service Home page, click the GSLB menu. Navigate to the GSLB List page.
- On the GSLB List page, click the resource to view its details. You will be taken to the GSLB Details page.
- On the GSLB Details page, click the Connection Targets tab. You will be taken to the Connection Targets tab page.
- Connection Target tab page, click the Edit Connection Target button. You will be taken to the Edit Connection Target page.
- On the Edit Connection Target page, modify the information you want.
- Add: Enter the target IP, select the location, and enter a description, then click the Add button to add the item.
- Delete: To delete the linked target item, click the Delete button.
- You can modify the Weight for each item in the connection target list.
- When the edit is complete, click Done. An edit notification window will open.
- Click OK in the alert dialog. The service information update is complete.
- You can add up to 8 targets to a single GSLB service.
- When adding a connection target, it is recommended to set the location field to a position close to the target server.
Configuring the Regional Routing Controller
You can query the Regional Routing Controller and change its usage status.
To change the usage status of the Regional Routing Controller, follow these steps.
All Services > Networking > GSLB Click the menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of GSLB.
On the Service Home page, click the Regional Routing Controller menu. You will be taken to the Regional Routing Controller List page.
Retrieve the resource to view detailed information on the Regional Routing Controller List page.
- Advanced Search button can be clicked to select domain, connection location, and usage status for the search.
On the Regional Routing Controller List page, view the resource information and change its usage status.
Category Detailed description domain name Registered domain name - When you click the domain name, you will be taken to the GSLB Details > Connection Targets tab page
Purpose Domain purpose Connection location Location to perform monitoring of the connection target Connection target by location Number of connection targets by location Whether to use Display the connection target usage status, and you can change the usage status by clicking the More button - Use: Enable the connection target
- Stop: Disable the connection target
- You can also set usage by selecting a domain from the list and choosing Use or Stop at the top
Table. Regional Routing Controller ListClick Confirm in the alert dialog. The domain usage status change is complete.
Terminate GSLB
You can request termination of the GSLB service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To request cancellation of the GSLB service, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > GSLB menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of GSLB.
- On the Service Home page, click the GSLB menu. You will be taken to the GSLB List page.
- On the GSLB List page, click the resource you want to view detailed information for. You will be taken to the GSLB Details page.
- On the GSLB Details page, click the Cancel Service button.
- After the termination is complete, check the service termination status in the GSLB list.
15.3 - API Reference
15.4 - CLI Reference
15.5 - Release Note
GSLB
- You can control the usage of traffic you want to connect via GSLB on a per-region basis.
- We have launched a GSLB service that can automatically distribute network traffic to adjacent regions based on DNS when traffic increases in a specific global region, providing stable service.
16 - Cloud Virtual Circuit
A service that provides 1:1 virtual circuits based on line bandwidth between Global Samsung Cloud Platform regions or customer locations.
16.1 - Overview
Service Overview
The Cloud Virtual Circuit service provides a 1:1 virtual circuit based on line bandwidth between global Samsung Cloud Platform regions or customer locations.
Features
Cloud Virtual Circuit offers the following features and benefits.
- Mesh-shaped point-to-point connection: The Samsung Cloud Platform infrastructure is connected across all global regions, allowing point-to-point virtual circuit services to be used anywhere from source to destination.
- No-Contract Short-Term Line Service: Unlike traditional network line services, it offers a no-contract pricing plan, allowing cost-effective use when short-term line service is needed.
- Special Feature Provision: Provides a special function that can split a single virtual circuit into multiple logical circuits for different purposes.
Service Architecture Diagram
Provided features
The Cloud Virtual Circuit service provides the following features.
- Korean and global service provision
- South Korea: Suwon, Sangam, Chuncheon, Gumi, Nonhyeon
- Global: New Jersey, San Jose, São Paulo, London, Frankfurt, Hong Kong, Singapore, Delhi, Dubai, Tokyo
- Provision of point-to-point virtual circuit service between global regions (L2VPN-based)
- You can select the origin and destination access locations in all service regions.
- A single cloud virtual circuit configures up to two virtual links for redundancy.
- Provided circuit bandwidth:
- 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 Mbps
- 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 Gbps
- Provides logical circuit separation (Multi VLAN): Up to five separate VLANs can be used on a single cloud virtual circuit.
Component
Cloud Virtual Circuit provides a 1:1 virtual backbone connection between global locations. The components are as follows, and resources can be created via the related self‑service in the user console.
| Category | content |
|---|---|
| Cloud Virtual Circuit | Virtual resources that accommodate up to two Virtual Links for the same 1:1 endpoint |
| Origin Access Location | 1:1 Virtual circuit’s source Access Location information |
| Destination Access Location | 1:1 virtual circuit destination Access Location information |
| Multi VLAN | A feature that splits a single Virtual Link into multiple logical circuits for provisioning. |
| Virtual Link | Within a Cloud Virtual Circuit, a virtual circuit based on dedicated line bandwidth (line bandwidth, contract term, transmission path level option selection) |
| CE equipment | Network equipment that receives the dedicated line for the customer site (Customer Edge) |
Constraints
Cloud Virtual Circuit has the following limitations.
- For each Cloud Virtual Circuit, you can create up to two Virtual Links.
- The Multi VLAN feature can create up to five per Cloud Virtual Circuit.
Provision status by region
The Cloud Virtual Circuit service can be provided in the following environments.
| Region | Provision status |
|---|---|
| Korea West 1 (kr-west1) | Provided |
| Korea East 1 (kr-east1) | Not provided |
| South Korea South 1 (kr-south1) | Not provided |
| South Korea South 2 (kr-south2) | Not provided |
| South Korea South 3 (kr-south3) | Not provided |
Prior Service
There are no services that need to be pre‑configured before creating this service.
16.2 - How-to guides
Users can apply for the Cloud Virtual Circuit service through Service Request in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Apply for Cloud Virtual Circuit
You can request a Cloud Virtual Circuit through the Support Center of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To apply for a Cloud Virtual Circuit, follow the steps below.
Click the All Services > Networking > Cloud Virtual Circuit menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Cloud Virtual Circuit.
On the Service Home page, click the Cloud Virtual Circuit Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request page in the Support Center.
Select and enter the information required to apply for a Cloud Virtual Circuit.
Category Required statusDetailed description Title Required Enter the title of the service request - using Korean, English, numbers, and special characters (
+=,.@-_) within 64 characters
Region Required Select the region to request the service Service Required Networking service group Cloud Virtual Circuit service selection Task classification Required Cloud Virtual Circuit New Application Select content Required Enter information for Cloud Virtual Circuit application Table. Cloud Virtual Circuit Service Request Items- using Korean, English, numbers, and special characters (
Check the input information and click the Request button.
- After submitting a service request, you cannot modify or delete the content you have entered.
- After submitting a service request, you can view the request details on the Support Center’s Service Request List page. Refer to View Service Request Details.
Cloud Virtual Circuit Terminate
You can request the termination of a Cloud Virtual Circuit from the Support Center in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To apply for a Cloud Virtual Circuit, follow the steps below.
Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page.
On the Service Home page, click the Cloud Virtual Circuit Service Request menu. You will be taken to the Service Request page.
Select and enter the information required to cancel the Cloud Virtual Circuit.
Category Required statusDetailed description Title Required Enter a title for the service request - using Korean, English, numbers, and special characters(
+=,.@-_) within 64 characters
Region Required Select the region for which you want to request service termination. Service Required Networking service group Cloud Virtual Circuit service selection Task classification Required Cloud Virtual Circuit Cancellation Request Select content Required Enter information for Cloud Virtual Circuit termination request Table. Cloud Virtual Circuit Service Termination Request Items- using Korean, English, numbers, and special characters(
Check the input information and click the Request button.
- After submitting a service request, you cannot modify or delete the content you entered.
- After submitting a service request, you can view the request details on the Support Center’s Service Request List page. Refer to 서비스 요청 상세 정보 확인하기.
16.3 - Release Note
Cloud Virtual Circuit
- We have officially launched the Cloud Virtual Circuit service.
- Users can request a 1:1 virtual circuit based on the line bandwidth between Global Samsung Cloud Platform regions or customer sites.
17 - Private 5G Cloud
17.1 - Overview
Service Overview
Private 5G Cloud is a service based on the Samsung Cloud Platform that provides Private 5G Core and Edge solutions to enterprise customers. By leveraging the cloud, it minimizes the deployment of physical 5G network equipment, enabling the construction of a flexible and scalable network environment optimized for the customer’s private environment, and allowing easy connection of multiple geographically distributed locations.
Provides a dedicated enterprise 5G Core in a cloud environment, ensures service availability through stable operation, and enables real-time processing of large internal data and secure protection of critical data via Edge solutions.
Features
- Stable Operation: Private 5G Cloud combines a 5G Core that has been validated for quality and reliability with cloud security policies. It also provides 24‑hour monitoring services by specialized 5G operations personnel. This enables regular system diagnostics and rapid response in case of failures, allowing the service to be operated stably. Efficient Cost Management: By deploying a Private 5G network on the Samsung Cloud Platform, you can reduce initial investment costs for building a 5G system and minimize operational expenses. It enables a fast and secure cloud‑based Private 5G network, as well as flexible operation and capacity scaling.
- Private Edge Solution Offering: We provide application management and Edge Computing services based on Kubernetes that apply the 3GPP MEC standard. By configuring an Edge Computing service environment within the client’s premises, ultra‑low‑latency data transmission is possible, and because all data and services reside within the client’s premises, the company’s valuable information can be securely protected.. Various Integration Features: You can access a variety of solutions and software validated in the Private 5G Open Lab through the marketplace. Customers can leverage the pre-configured development environment and related ecosystem to adopt emerging technologies such as AI, machine learning, and big data, and can use customized solutions.
Service Architecture Diagram
Provided features
Private 5G Cloud provides the following features. Private 5G Cloud Core: Provision of cloud-based 5G wireless network and authentication services Private 5G Core CP: Processing customer-specific 5G signal control in the cloud domain UPF: Data processing of each customer’s unique service in the customer’s site area 5G network: handling dedicated network services (VPN/dedicated line) between the cloud and the customer’s premises
Component
Private 5G Cloud provides services across the entire 5G network within the customer’s site, and its components are as follows.
5G Core network
- User authentication, session management, data processing
- Customer device registration/deletion/modification/management
Service Portal
- Provision of a 5G integrated service portal
- User portal: Create/modify/manage user policies
- Admin Portal: Authentication Policy Management and Monitoring
Network Solution
Configure cloud network solutions such as VPN and dedicated lines
Provision status by region
Private 5G Cloud can be provided in the environments below.
| Region | Provision status |
|---|---|
| Korea West 1 (kr-west1) | Provided |
| Korea East 1 (kr-east1) | Provide |
| South Korea South 1 (kr-south1) | Provide |
| South Korea South 2 (kr-south2) | Provided |
| South Korea 3 (kr-south3) | Provided |
Prior Service
This is a list of services that must be pre‑configured before creating the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service for details and prepare in advance.
| Service Category | service | Detailed description |
|---|---|---|
| Compute | Virtual Server | Virtual server optimized for cloud computing |
| Networking | VPC | A service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment |
| Networking | Security Group | Virtual firewall that controls server traffic |
| Networking | Direct Connect | A service that securely and quickly connects the customer’s network with the Samsung Cloud Platform |
| Networking | Firewall | A service that provides a firewall for traffic between the VPC, the Internet, and the customer’s network. |
| Networking | VPN | A service that connects the customer’s network and Samsung Cloud Platform via an encrypted virtual private network
|
17.2 - How-to guides
Users can enter the required information for the Private 5G Cloud service, select detailed options, and create the service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
Create Private 5G Cloud
You can create and use a Private 5G Cloud service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To create a Private 5G Cloud, follow these steps.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Private 5G Cloud menu. You will be taken to the Private 5G Cloud Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Private 5G Cloud Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request page.
- On the Service Request page, select or enter the required information for Private 5G Cloud.informationIn the task category, select Private 5G Cloud Service Creation and create it.
| Input field | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Title | Title of the service you want to request |
| Region | Select location of Samsung Cloud Platform
|
| service | Select the service group and service for the given service
|
| Task classification | Select the task to perform
|
| content | Enter detailed information required to create a Private 5G Cloud [Basic Information]
[Application Information]
|
| Attachment | Proceed with upload only if there are additional files you want to share
|
- Review the entered generation information and click the Request button.
- Once creation is complete, check the Service Request List page to see if the resource was created.
- This provisioning process involves steps such as purchasing physical servers, delivery, configuration, and site setup, and requires a minimum of eight weeks of business days.
Check Private 5G Cloud application details
You can view the application and cancellation history of the Private 5G Cloud service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
To view the service application and termination request history of Private 5G Cloud, follow the steps below.
To check your Private 5G Cloud service application details, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. Navigate to the Support Center > Service Home page.
- On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request menu. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.
- On the Service Request List page, click the Title of the service request you submitted. You will be taken to the Service Request Details page.
- Service Request Details page, check the request status and information.
Terminate Private 5G Cloud
You can reduce operating costs by terminating the Private 5G Cloud service whose contract period has expired.
- If you terminate the service, the running service may be stopped immediately, so you should proceed with the termination only after fully considering the impact of the service interruption.
- To request service termination before the contract period expires, you must first complete the termination of the Private 5G Cloud contract through prior consultation between the user’s contract manager and Samsung SDS contract manager, and then proceed with termination according to the steps below.
To cancel Private 5G Cloud, follow the steps below.
- Click the All Services > Networking > Private 5G Cloud menu. You will be taken to the Private 5G Cloud Service Home page.
- On the Service Home page, click the Private 5G Cloud Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request page.
- On the Service Request page, select or enter the required information for Private 5G Cloud.InformationIn the task category, select Private 5G Cloud Service Termination and cancel it.
| Input field | Detailed description |
|---|---|
| Title | Title of the service you want to request |
| Region | Select location of Samsung Cloud Platform
|
| service | Select the service group and service for this service
|
| Task classification | Select the task you want to perform
|
| Content | Private 5G Cloud Enter detailed information required for termination [Basic Information]
|
| Attachment | Only proceed with upload if there are additional files you want to share
|
- Review the entered generation information and click the Request button.
- After the termination is complete, check on the Service Request List page whether the resource has been terminated.
- The termination process is completed after the physical server is returned, and it takes at least 3–4 weeks of business days.













